WO2021136260A1 - Appareil de régulation et procédé de régulation de paramètres physiques variables - Google Patents

Appareil de régulation et procédé de régulation de paramètres physiques variables Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021136260A1
WO2021136260A1 PCT/CN2020/140784 CN2020140784W WO2021136260A1 WO 2021136260 A1 WO2021136260 A1 WO 2021136260A1 CN 2020140784 W CN2020140784 W CN 2020140784W WO 2021136260 A1 WO2021136260 A1 WO 2021136260A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
range
physical parameter
measurement value
code
measurement
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/140784
Other languages
English (en)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
钟国诚
Original Assignee
钟国诚
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 钟国诚 filed Critical 钟国诚
Priority to CN202080091307.0A priority Critical patent/CN114930257B/zh
Publication of WO2021136260A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021136260A1/fr

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G05—CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05B—CONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B13/00—Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion
    • G05B13/02—Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion electric
    • G05B13/04—Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion electric involving the use of models or simulators
    • G05B13/042—Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion electric involving the use of models or simulators in which a parameter or coefficient is automatically adjusted to optimise the performance
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G05—CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05B—CONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B13/00—Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion
    • G05B13/02—Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion electric
    • G05B13/04—Adaptive control systems, i.e. systems automatically adjusting themselves to have a performance which is optimum according to some preassigned criterion electric involving the use of models or simulators
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G05—CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05B—CONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B19/00—Programme-control systems
    • G05B19/02—Programme-control systems electric
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02B—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES RELATED TO BUILDINGS, e.g. HOUSING, HOUSE APPLIANCES OR RELATED END-USER APPLICATIONS
    • Y02B20/00—Energy efficient lighting technologies, e.g. halogen lamps or gas discharge lamps
    • Y02B20/40—Control techniques providing energy savings, e.g. smart controller or presence detection

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a control device, and more particularly to a control device and method for controlling a variable physical parameter by a trigger event.
  • a trigger event can be one of a user input event, a signal input event, and a recognition medium occurrence event, and can be applied to a control device to control a control target device.
  • the control target device can use at least one of a mechanical energy, an electrical energy, and a light energy, and can include an electric motor for an access control, a relay for an electric power control, and an energy conversion device. One of an energy converter.
  • the control device transmits a control signal to the control target device to control the control target device depending on the trigger event.
  • the control device can obtain a measurement value provided based on a variable physical parameter.
  • the control device may need an improved mechanism to effectively use the measured value and thereby effectively control the control target device.
  • U.S. Patent No. 2015/0357887 A1 discloses a product specification setting device and a fan motor provided with the same.
  • U.S. Patent No. 7,411,505 Announcement B2 discloses a switch state and radio frequency identification tag.
  • An object of the present disclosure is to provide a control device and method that rely on a trigger event and a sensing unit to effectively control a variable physical parameter.
  • An embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a control device for controlling a variable physical parameter.
  • the variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range.
  • the control device includes a sensing unit and an operating unit.
  • the sensing unit senses the variable physical parameter to generate a first sensing signal.
  • the operating unit is coupled to the sensing unit, and responds to the first sensing signal to obtain a first measurement value when a trigger event occurs, and checks the first measurement value in the operating unit
  • the first mathematical relationship between the measured value and the application range of the measured value determines that the variable physical parameter is currently in the physical parameter application range and the output is used to cause the variable physical parameter to enter the physical parameter.
  • a first control signal of the parameter target range is used to cause the variable physical parameter to enter the physical parameter.
  • Another embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a method for controlling a variable physical parameter by generating a first control signal within a first operating time.
  • the variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range.
  • the method includes the following steps: sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a first sensing signal; under the condition that a trigger event occurs, responding to the first sensing signal to obtain a first measurement value; and Under the condition that the physical parameter application range in which the variable physical parameter is currently located is determined by checking a first mathematical relationship between the first measurement value and the measurement value application range, the use is made It is a reasonable decision whether a first trigger signal at the first operating time is to be additionally generated, and the first control signal is used to cause the variable physical parameter to enter the physical parameter target range.
  • Another embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a method for controlling a variable physical parameter.
  • the variable physical parameter is characterized based on a physical parameter application range represented by a measurement value application range and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter application range.
  • the method includes the following steps: sensing the variable physical parameter to generate a first sensing signal; under the condition that a trigger event occurs, responding to the first sensing signal to obtain a first measurement value; and Under the condition that the physical parameter application range in which the variable physical parameter is currently located is determined by checking a first mathematical relationship between the first measurement value and the measurement value application range, the A first control signal that causes the variable physical parameter to enter the target range of the physical parameter.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a control system in various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 6 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 10 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 14 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 15 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 16 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 17 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 18 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 19 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 20 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 21 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 22 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 23 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 24 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 25 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 26 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 27 A schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 28 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 29 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 30 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 31 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 32 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 33 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 34 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 35 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 36 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 37 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 38 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 39 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 40 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 41 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 42 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 43 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 44 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 45 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 46 A schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • Fig. 47 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure of the control system shown in Fig. 1.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a control system 801 in various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the control system 801 includes a control target device 330 and a control device 210 for controlling the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 has a variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L and a physical parameter target range RD1ET different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the control device 210 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A includes a sensing unit 334 and an operating unit 297.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN11.
  • the operating unit 297 is coupled to the sensing unit 334, and responds to the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain a first measurement value VN11 under the condition that a trigger event EQ11 occurs, and the operating unit 297 uses Check a first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L to determine that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL and output for A first control signal SC11 that causes the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8011 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8011 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330.
  • the first control signal SC11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET is represented by a measured value target range RN1T, and is the same as or different from a first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.
  • the measured value target range RN1T has a target range limit value pair DN1T.
  • the target range limit value is preset for DN1T.
  • Both the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL are included in a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a sensor specification FU11 related to the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor measurement range representation GW1R for representing a sensor measurement range RB1E, and a sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW11.
  • the sensor sensitivity YW11 is related to a sensing signal generated by the sensing unit 334 to generate HF11.
  • the first measurement value VN11 is obtained by the operation unit 297 in a designated measurement value format HH11.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L and a measurement value candidate range RN12 representing the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are both based on one of the sensor measurement range representation GW1R and the sensor specification FU11 to use the specified measurement
  • the value format HH11 is preset.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value candidate range RN12 are preset based on the sensor measurement range indication GW1R and the sensor sensitivity indication GW11 in the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L has an application range limit value pair DN1L.
  • the application range limit value is preset for DN1L.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12 has a candidate range limit value pair DN1B.
  • the candidate range limit value is preset for DN1B.
  • the operating unit 297 obtains the application range limit value pair DN1L in response to the trigger event EQ11, and checks the first measurement value VN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L. A mathematical relationship KV11.
  • the operating unit 297 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain the default target range limit value pair DN1T and a control preset based on a designated physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET Data code CK1T, and execute a signal generation control GS11 based on the obtained control data code CK1T to output the first control signal SC11.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the operation unit 297 includes a trigger application unit 281.
  • the trigger event EQ11 is related to the trigger application unit 281.
  • the trigger application unit 281 generates an operation request signal SX11 in response to the trigger event EQ11.
  • the operation unit 297 obtains the first measurement value VN11 based on the first sensing signal SN11 in response to the operation request signal SX11, and obtains the application range limit value pair DN1L in response to the operation request signal SX11 .
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL is configured to correspond to a corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL outside the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the operating unit 297 determines the corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11, the operating unit 297 is configured to obtain the default The candidate range limit value pair DN1B, and a data comparison CD21 between the first measured value VN11 and the obtained candidate range limit value pair DN1B is performed.
  • the first measurement value VN81 is a physical parameter measurement value.
  • the operating unit 297 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 based on the data comparison CD21, the operating unit 297 outputs a different output from the first control
  • the signal SC11 is a second control signal SC12.
  • the second control signal SC12 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 to enter a second one included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ... Physical parameter candidate range RD1E3.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sensing signal SN12.
  • the operating unit 297 responds to the second sensing signal SN12 within a specified time TG12 after the operating time TD11 to obtain a second measurement value VN12 in the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the operating unit 297 determines the current variable physical parameter QU1A by comparing the second measured value VN12 with the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T.
  • the operating unit 297 executes a data storage control operation GU11, and the data storage control operation GU11 is used to cause a physical parameter target range code representing the determined physical parameter target range RD1ET UN1T is recorded.
  • the data storage control operation GU11 is a guarantee operation.
  • variable physical parameter QU1A is related to a variable time length LF1A.
  • the operating unit 297 is used to measure the variable time length LF1A.
  • the variable time length LF1A is characterized based on a time length reference range HJ11 and a reference time length LJ1T.
  • the time length reference range HJ11 is represented by a measurement time length value reference range GJ11.
  • the reference time length LJ1T is represented by a measured time length value CL1T.
  • the obtained control data code CK1T includes the measurement time length value CL1T.
  • the operation unit 297 checks a numerical relationship KJ11 between the measurement time length value CL1T and the measurement time length value reference range GJ11 to determine whether a counting operation BC1T for controlling a specific time TJ1T is to be performed One logic determines PE11. Under the condition that the logical decision PE11 is affirmative, the operation unit 297 performs the counting operation BC1T based on the measurement time length value CL1T.
  • the operating unit 297 Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the trigger event EQ11, the operating unit 297 reaches the specific time TJ1T based on the counting operation BC1T , And generate a third control signal SC22 different from the first control signal SC11 within the specific time TJ1T.
  • the third control signal SC22 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8012 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8013 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8014 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8015 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8016 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1. 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7, each of the implementation structure 8012, the implementation structure 8013, the implementation structure 8014, the implementation structure 8015, and the implementation structure 8016
  • the structure includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330.
  • the operating unit 297 is configured to execute a measurement application function FC11 related to the physical parameter application range RD1EL, and includes a processing unit 230 coupled to the sensing unit 334, and An output unit 240 of the processing unit 230.
  • the measurement application function FC11 is configured to comply with a measurement application function specification GCL1 related to the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a sensor specification FU11 related to the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the measurement application function FC11 is a trigger application function.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 is a trigger application function specification.
  • the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor measurement range representation GW1R for representing a sensor measurement range RB1E, and a sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW11.
  • the sensor sensitivity YW11 is related to a sensing signal generated by the sensing unit 334 to generate HF11.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to perform the sensing signal generation HF11 dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW11, and the sensing signal generation HF11 is used to generate the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in the designated measurement value format HH11.
  • the specified measurement value format HH11 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UY11.
  • the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to output the first control signal SC11.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on a rated physical parameter range RD1E.
  • the rated physical parameter range RD1E is represented by a rated measurement value range RD1N, and includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ... represented by a plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... .
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are both included in the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes the sensor specification FU11, a rated physical parameter range representation GC1E for representing the rated physical parameter range RD1E, and a physical parameter application range representing the physical parameter application range RD1EL Represents GC1L.
  • the rated measurement value range RD1N is based on the rated physical parameter range representing GC1E, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, and a first data encoding operation ZX11 for converting the rated physical parameter range representing GC1E It is preset using the specified measurement value format HH11, has a rated range limit value pair DD1A, and contains the multiple different measurement values represented by multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... Reference range RN11, RN12,....
  • the rated range limit value pair DD1A is preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... include the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the rated measurement value range RD1N and the rated range limit value pair DD1A are preset based on one of the sensor measurement range representation GW1R and the sensor specification FU11 in the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L is represented by a measurement value application range code EM1L included in the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ..., and has an application range limit value pair DN1L; thereby
  • the measurement value application range code EM1L is configured to indicate the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... are all defaulted based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the application range limit value pair DN1L includes a first application range limit value DN15 of the measurement value application range RN1L and a second application range limit value DN16 relative to the first application range limit value DN15, and is based on all
  • the physical parameter application range represents GC1L
  • the sensor measurement range represents GW1R
  • a second data encoding operation ZX12 for converting the physical parameter application range represents GC1L is preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L is preset based on the physical parameter application range representation GC1L, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, and the second data encoding operation ZX12 using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the control device 210 further includes a storage unit 250 coupled to the processing unit 230 and includes a trigger application unit 281 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the storage unit 250 stores the default rating range limit value pair DD1A and a variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the variable physical parameter range code UN1A is equal to a specific measurement value selected from the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... Range code EM14.
  • the control target device 330 is located at one of the inside of the control device 210 and the outside of the control device 210. Under the condition that the control target device 330 is located inside the control device 210, the control device 210 includes the control target device 330.
  • the specific measurement value range code EM14 indicates a first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 previously determined by the processing unit 230 based on a sensing operation ZS11.
  • the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is selected from the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,....
  • the sensing operation ZS11 performed by the sensing unit 334 is used to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the specific measurement value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the specific measurement value range code EM14. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 based on the sensing operation ZS11 before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to The obtained specific measurement value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the specific measurement value range code EM14 represents a specific measurement value range configured to represent the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4.
  • the specific measurement value range is preset in the specified measurement value format HH11 based on one of the sensor measurement range representation GW1R and the sensor specification FU11.
  • the sensing unit 334 performs a sensing signal generation dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW11 by performing the sensing operation ZS11 to generate a sensing signal.
  • the processing unit 230 receives the sensing signal, responds to the sensing signal to obtain a specific measurement value in the specified measurement value format HH11, and executes a method for checking the specific measurement value.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to The obtained specific measurement value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the processing unit 230 determines whether the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to change the variable physical parameter range code UN1A in response to a specific sensing operation for sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the specific sensing operation is performed by the sensing unit 334.
  • the trigger application unit 281 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to cause the processing unit 230 to receive an operation request signal SX11. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains an operation reference data code XU11 from the storage unit 250 in response to the operation request signal SX11, and executes the operation by running a data determination program NA1A.
  • a data of the operation reference data code XU11 determines AA1A to determine the measurement value application range code EM1L selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... for reference from the plurality of different measurement values Select the measurement value application range RN1L from the ranges RN11, RN12,...
  • the operation reference data code XU11 is the same as an allowable reference data code that is defaulted based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the data determination program NA1A is constructed based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the data determination AA1A is one of a first data determination operation AA11 and a second data determination operation AA12. Under the condition that the operation reference data code XU11 is obtained by accessing the variable physical parameter range code UN1A stored in the storage unit 250 to be the same as the specific measurement value range code EM14, yes
  • the data determination AA1A of the first data determination operation AA11 determines the measurement value application range code EM1L based on the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14. For example, the determined measurement value application range code EM1L is the same as or different from the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14.
  • the operation reference data code XU11 is obtained by accessing the rated range limit value pair DD1A stored in the storage unit 250 to obtain the same conditions as the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A Next, it is the data determination AA1A of the second data determination operation AA12 by performing a first scientific calculation MR11 using the first measurement value VN11 and the obtained rated range limit value pair DD1A to obtain the result
  • the measurement value application range code EM1L is selected from the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... to determine the measurement value application range code EM1L.
  • the first scientific calculation MR11 is executed based on a specific empirical formula XR11.
  • the specific empirical formula XR11 is formulated in advance based on the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A and the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12,...
  • the specific empirical formula XR11 is formulated in advance based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the application range limit value pair DN1L based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L, and based on the first measurement value VN11 and the obtained application A first data comparison between the range limit value and DN1L CD11 to check the first mathematical relationship KV11 to determine whether the first measurement value VN11 is within the selected measurement value application range RN1L
  • the first logic determines PB11. Under the condition that the first logical decision PB11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VN11 based on the first sensing signal SN11 in response to the operation request signal SX11, and obtains the application range limit value in response to the operation request signal SX11 To DN1L.
  • the trigger application unit 281 generates the operation request signal SX11 in response to the trigger event EQ11, provides the operation request signal SX11 to the processing unit 230, and thereby causes the processing unit 230 to receive the operation request signal SX11.
  • the processing unit 230 makes the first logical decision PB11 by comparing the first measured value VN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L to become affirmative. Under the condition that the first application range limit value DN15, the second application range limit value DN16, and the first measurement value VN11 are equal, the processing unit 230 compares the first measurement value VN11 with The obtained application range limit value is affirmative for DN1L to make the first logical decision PB11.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A exists in a control target device 330.
  • the trigger event EQ11 is one of a trigger action event, a user input event, a signal input event, a state change event, an identification medium occurrence event, and an integer overflow event, and is applied to the measurement application Function FC11.
  • the control target device 330 is configured to execute a specific functional operation ZH11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the specific function operation ZH11 is used to cause the triggering event to occur.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 further includes a physical parameter representing GC1T1.
  • the physical parameter representation GC1T1 is used to represent a designated physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the specific function operation ZH11 is a spatial movement operation.
  • the measurement application function FC11 is related to a memory unit 25Y1.
  • the memory unit 25Y1 has a first memory location PN1L and a second memory location PX1L different from the first memory location PN1L, the application range limit value pair DN1L is stored in the first memory location PN1L, and the The second memory location PX1L stores a control data code CK1T.
  • the first memory location PN1L and the second memory location PX1L are both identified based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L.
  • the control data code CK1T includes a control code CC1T.
  • control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC1T1 and a third data encoding operation ZX21 for converting the physical parameter representation GC1T1.
  • application range limit value pair DN1L and the control data code CK1T are stored by the memory unit 25Y1 based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L.
  • the processing unit 230 executes a data acquisition AD1A using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L by running a data acquisition program ND1A to obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L.
  • the data acquisition AD1A is one of a first data acquisition operation AD11 and a second data acquisition operation AD12.
  • the data acquisition program ND1A is constructed based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the first data acquisition operation AD11 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the application range limit value pair DN1L stored in the first memory location PN1L based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L Obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L.
  • the second data obtaining operation AD12 obtains the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A by reading the rated range limit value pair DD1A stored in the storage unit 250, and uses it by executing The determined measurement value application range code EM1L and a second scientific calculation MZ11 of the obtained rated range limit value pair DD1A are used to obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L.
  • the rated range limit value pair DD1A includes a rated range limit value DD11 of the rated measurement value range RD1N and a rated range limit value DD12 relative to the rated range limit value DD11, and is based on the rated physical parameter
  • the range represents GC1E
  • the sensor measurement range represents GW1R
  • the first data encoding operation ZX11 is preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the memory based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L
  • the unit 25Y1 accesses the control data code CK1T stored in the second memory location PX1L, and executes a signal generation control for the measurement application function FC11 based on the accessed control data code CK1T GS11 to control the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 responds to the signal generation control GS11 to execute a first signal generation operation BS11 for the measurement application function FC11 to generate the first control signal SC11.
  • the first control signal SC11 conveys the control code CC1T, and is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... further include a measurement value target range RN1T that is different from the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 further includes a first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T for representing the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the measurement value target range RN1T is represented by a measurement value target range code EM1T that is different from the measurement value application range code EM1L, has a target range limit value pair DN1T, and is configured to represent the physical parameter target range RD1ET ; Thereby the measured value target range code EM1T is configured to indicate the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the measurement value target range code EM1T is included in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12,...
  • the target range limit value pair DN1T is based on the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, and a fourth data encoding operation ZX13 for converting the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T.
  • the specified measurement value format HH11 is preset.
  • the measurement value target range RN1T is preset in the specified measurement value format HH11 based on the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, and the fourth data encoding operation ZX13.
  • the total number of reference ranges NT11 is defaulted based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain the total reference range number NT11.
  • the first scientific calculation MR11 further uses the obtained total reference range number NT11.
  • the second scientific calculation MZ11 further uses the obtained total reference range number NT11.
  • the total number of reference ranges is greater than or equal to two.
  • the control target device 330 receives the first control signal SC11, obtains the control code CC1T from the received first control signal SC11, and causes the variable physical control code CC1T based on the obtained control code CC1T.
  • the parameter QU1A changes from a first specific physical parameter QU13 to a second specific physical parameter QU14.
  • the first specific physical parameter QU13 is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the second specific physical parameter QU14 is within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the control target device 330 is coupled to the output unit 240.
  • the control target device 330 is installed on the control device 210 or supported by the control device 210.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L is a first part of the rated measurement value range RD1N.
  • the measured value target range RN1T is a second part of the rated measured value range RD1N.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are separate or adjacent. Under the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are separated, the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value target range RN1T are separated. Under the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are adjacent, the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value target range RN1T are adjacent.
  • the measurement value application range code EM1L is configured to be equal to an integer.
  • the rated range limit value DD12 is greater than the rated range limit value DD11.
  • the relative value VA11 is equal to a calculation result of the rated range limit value DD12 minus the rated range limit value DD11.
  • the application range limit value pair DN1L is determined based on the rated range limit value DD11, the rated range limit value DD12, the integer, and a ratio of the relative value VA11 to the total reference range number NT11 Preset.
  • the second scientific calculation MZ11 uses one of the rated range limit value DD11, the rated range limit value DD12, the integer, the ratio, and any combination thereof.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET is the same or different from a first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 further includes a second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12 for representing the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12 is represented by a measurement value candidate range code EM12 that is different from the measurement value application range code EM1L, has a candidate range threshold pair DN1B, and is configured to represent the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 ; Thereby the measured value candidate range code EM12 is configured to indicate the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.
  • the candidate range threshold value pair DN1B is based on the second physical parameter candidate range representing GC12, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, and a fifth data code used to transform the second physical parameter candidate range representing GC12 Operate ZX14 to be preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12 is preset in the designated measurement value format HH11 based on the second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, and the fifth data encoding operation ZX14.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the selection by executing a third scientific calculation MR21 using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L
  • the measurement value candidate range code EM12 from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... so as to select the measurement value candidate range RN12 from the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... .
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the candidate range limit value pair DN1B based on the determined measurement value candidate range code EM12, and obtains the candidate range limit value pair DN1B based on the first measurement value VN11 and the obtained candidate range limit value pair DN1B.
  • the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to execute the measurement application function FC11
  • a second signal generating operation BS21 is used to generate a second control signal SC12 that is different from the first control signal SC11.
  • the second control signal SC12 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 to enter a second one included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ... Physical parameter candidate range RD1E3.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sensing Signal SN12. For example, after the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to perform a sensing signal generation HF12 dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW11, so The sensing signal generating HF12 is used to generate the second sensing signal SN12.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the second sensing signal SN12 within a specified time TG12 after the operating time TD11 to obtain a second measurement value VN12 in the specified measurement value format HH11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11, the processing unit 230 performs processing based on one of the accessed control data code CK1T and the determined measurement value application range code EM1L The measurement value target range code EM1T is determined to determine the measurement value target range RN1T.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the target range limit value pair DN1T based on the determined measurement value target range code EM1T, and obtains the target range limit value pair DN1T based on the second measurement value VN12 and the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T.
  • the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by making the third logical decision PB22 Under the condition of the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the processing unit 230 is based on the difference between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 and the determined measurement value target range code EM1T A first code difference between DF11 is used to use the storage unit 250 to assign the determined measurement value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the output unit 240 displays a first status indicator LB11.
  • the first state indication LB11 is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured in a first specific state XJ11 within the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4.
  • the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by making the third logical decision PB22 Under the condition of the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the processing unit 230 further causes the output unit 240 to change the first status indicator LB11 to a second status indicator LB12 based on the first code difference DF11.
  • the second state indication LB12 is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured in a second specific state XJ12 within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the operating unit 297 further includes a response area AC1, a reader 220, and an input unit 270.
  • the response area AC1 is used to execute the measurement application function FC11.
  • the reader 220 is coupled to the response area AC1.
  • the input unit 270 is coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 is the occurrence event of the identification medium and the processing unit 230 has identified an identification medium 310 appearing in the response area AC1 through the reader 220, the processing unit 230
  • the first measurement value VN11 is obtained based on the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the input unit 270 includes an input component 442.
  • the input component 442 is coupled to the processing unit 230 and includes a button 4402 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the input component 442 receives a user input operation BQ11 using the button 4402, and
  • the processing unit 230 receives an operation request signal SJ61.
  • the button 4402 receives the user input operation BQ11.
  • the processing unit 230 determines a specific input code UW11 in response to the operation request signal SJ61.
  • the input component 442 generates the operation request signal SJ61 in response to the user input operation BQ11 using the button 4402, provides the operation request signal SJ61 to the processing unit 230, and thereby causes the processing
  • the unit 230 receives the operation request signal SJ61.
  • the specific input code UW11 is selected from the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12,...
  • variable physical parameter range code UN1A when the input component 442 receives the user input operation BQ11, the variable physical parameter range code UN1A is equal to the preset measurement value target range code EM1T.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SJ61 to obtain the measurement value target range code EM1T from the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the processing unit 230 is based on the variable physical parameter equal to the determined measurement value target range code EM1T
  • a second code difference DX11 between the range code UN1A and the specific input code UW11 causes the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET through the output unit 240 to enter the multiple A second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 among the two different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 is represented by a specific physical parameter range code UN15.
  • the processing unit 230 causes the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter through the output unit 240 based on the second code difference DX11 The second specific physical parameter range RD1E5.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A in a restraining condition FR11 to provide the first sensing signal SN11 to the processing unit 230.
  • the constraint condition FR11 is that the variable physical parameter QU1A is equal to a third specific physical parameter QU11 included in the rated physical parameter range RD1E.
  • the processing unit 230 estimates the third specific physical parameter QU11 based on the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11.
  • the processing unit 230 recognizes that the first measurement value VN11 is within the measurement value application range RN1L A permissible value within, thereby identifying that the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L is a numerical intersection relationship, and thereby determining the variable physical The physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the parameter QU1A is currently located.
  • the sensing unit 334 is characterized based on the sensor sensitivity YW11 related to the sensing signal generation HF11, and is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU11.
  • the sensor specification FU11 includes the sensor sensitivity indication GW11 for indicating the sensor sensitivity YW11, and the sensor measurement range indication GW1R for indicating the sensor measurement range RB1E.
  • the rated physical parameter range RD1E is configured to be the same as the sensor measurement range RB1E, or configured to be a part of the sensor measurement range RB1E.
  • the sensor measurement range RB1E is related to a physical parameter sensing performed by the sensing unit 334.
  • the sensor measurement range means that GW1R is provided based on a first default measurement unit.
  • the first default measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12, the candidate range limit value pair DN1B, and the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... are all based on the sensor measurement range representing one of GW1R and the sensor specification FU11 First, the specified measurement value format HH11 is preset.
  • the rated measurement value range RD1N and the rated range limit value pair DD1A are based on the rated physical parameter range representing GC1E, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representing GW11, and the first data code Operate ZX11 to be preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L and the application range limit value pair DN1L are both based on the physical parameter application range representing GC1L, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representing GW11, and the second data encoding operation ZX12 To use the specified measurement value format HH11 and be preset.
  • the measurement value target range RN1T and the target range limit value pair DN1T are based on the first physical parameter candidate range representing GC1T, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representing GW11, and the fourth data code Operate ZX13 to be preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12 and the candidate range limit value pair DN1B are based on the second physical parameter candidate range representing GC12, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representing GW11, and the fifth data code Operate ZX14 to be preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the rated physical parameter range represents GC1E
  • the physical parameter application range represents GC1L
  • the physical parameter represents GC1T1
  • the first physical parameter candidate range represents GC1T
  • the second physical parameter candidate range represents GC12.
  • Two default measurement units are provided.
  • the second default measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit, and is the same as or different from the first default measurement unit.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the sensor measurement range RB1E.
  • the sensor measurement range represents GW1R
  • the rated physical parameter range represents GC1E
  • the physical parameter application range represents GC1L
  • the first physical parameter candidate range represents GC1T
  • the second physical parameter candidate range represents GC12 and
  • the physical parameters indicate that GC1T1 all belong to the decimal data type.
  • the first measurement value VN11, the second measurement value VN12, the rated range limit value pair DD1A, the application range limit value pair DN1L, the target range limit value pair DN1T, the candidate range limit value pair Both DN1B and the control code CC1T belong to the binary data type, and both are suitable for computer processing.
  • the sensor specification FU11 and the measurement application function specification GCL1 are both defaulted.
  • the first memory location PN1L is identified based on a first memory address FN1L.
  • the first memory address FN1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L.
  • the second memory location PX1L is identified based on a second memory address FX1L.
  • the second memory address FX1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the default measurement value application range code EM1L, the preset application range limit value pair DN1L, and the default control data Code CK1T, and the first memory address FN1L is obtained by applying a range code EM1L based on the obtained measurement value.
  • the processing unit 230 causes the operating unit 297 to provide the acquired data based on the acquired application range limit value pair DN1L and the acquired first memory address FN1L.
  • the application range limit value pair DN1L and the obtained first write request information WD1L of the first memory address FN1L is used to cause the memory unit 25Y1 to store the delivered application range limit value pair DN1L in the first memory location PN1L.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the second memory address FX1L based on the obtained measurement value application range code EM1L, and based on the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained
  • the second memory address FX1L causes the operating unit 297 to provide the acquired control data code CK1T and the acquired second write request information WC1L of the second memory address FX1L.
  • the second write request information WC1L is used to cause the memory unit 25Y1 to store the transferred control data code CK1T in the second memory location PX1L.
  • the control device 210 is coupled to a server 280.
  • the identification medium 310 is one of an electronic tag 350, a barcode medium 360, and a biometric identification medium 370.
  • One of the electronic tag 350, the storage unit 250, and the server 280 includes the memory unit 25Y1.
  • a method MT10 for controlling a variable physical parameter QU1A is disclosed.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L and a physical parameter target range RD1ET different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the method MT10 includes the following steps: sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN11; under the condition that a trigger event EQ11 occurs, responding to the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain a first sensing signal SN11 A measurement value VN11; and the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located by checking a first mathematical relationship between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L Under the condition that KV11 is determined, a first control signal SC11 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET is generated.
  • the first control signal SC11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET is represented by a measured value target range RN1T, and is the same as or different from a first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.
  • the measured value target range RN1T has a target range limit value pair DN1T.
  • the target range limit value is preset for DN1T.
  • Both the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL are included in a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the method MT10 further includes a step of providing a sensing unit 334.
  • the step of sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A is performed by using the sensing unit 334.
  • the sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a sensor specification FU11 related to the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor measurement range representation GW1R for representing a sensor measurement range RB1E, and a sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW11.
  • the sensor sensitivity YW11 is related to a sensing signal generated by the sensing unit 334 to generate HF11.
  • the first measurement value VN11 is obtained in a designated measurement value format HH11.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L and a measurement value candidate range RN12 representing the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are both based on one of the sensor measurement range representation GW1R and the sensor specification FU11 to use the specified measurement
  • the value format HH11 is preset.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L has an application range limit value pair DN1L.
  • the application range limit value is preset for DN1L.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12 has a candidate range limit value pair DN1B.
  • the candidate range limit value is preset for DN1B.
  • the method MT10 further includes the following steps: in response to the trigger event EQ11, obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L; and in response to the trigger event EQ11, obtain a specified physical parameter within the target range RD1ET of the physical parameter.
  • the parameter QD1T is a control data code CK1T preset.
  • the step of generating the first control signal SC11 includes a sub-step: based on the obtained control data code CK1T, a signal generation control GS11 is executed to generate the first control signal SC11.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL is configured to correspond to a corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL outside the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the method MT10 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located is determined by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11, Obtain the preset candidate range limit value pair DN1B; perform a data comparison CD21 between the first measured value VN11 and the obtained candidate range limit value pair DN1B; and in the variable physical parameter Under the condition that the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 that QU1A is currently in is determined based on the data comparison CD21, a second control signal SC12 that is different from the first control signal SC11 is generated.
  • the second control signal SC12 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 to enter a second one included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ... Physical parameter candidate range RD1E3.
  • the method MT10 further includes the following steps: in response to the trigger event EQ11, obtaining the default target range limit value pair DN1T; after the signal generation control GS11 is executed within an operating time TD11, sensing The variable physical parameter QU1A is used to generate a second sensing signal SN12; within a designated time TG12 after the operating time TD11, in response to the second sensing signal SN12 to obtain the designated measurement value format HH11 A second measured value VN12; and the target range RD1ET of the physical parameter in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located within the specified time TG12 by comparing the second measured value VN12 with the obtained Under the condition that the target range limit value is determined for DN1T, a data storage control operation GU11 is executed, and the data storage control operation GU11 is used to cause a physical parameter target range code UN1T representing the determined physical parameter target range RD1ET is recorded.
  • variable physical parameter QU1A is related to a variable time length LF1A.
  • the variable time length LF1A is characterized based on a time length reference range HJ11 and a reference time length LJ1T.
  • the time length reference range HJ11 is represented by a measurement time length value reference range GJ11.
  • the reference time length LJ1T is represented by a measured time length value CL1T.
  • the obtained control data code CK1T includes the measurement time length value CL1T.
  • the method MT10 further includes the following steps: checking a numerical relationship KJ11 between the measurement time length value CL1T and the measurement time length value reference range GJ11 to make a counting operation BC1T for controlling a specific time TJ1T whether A logical decision PE11 to be executed; and under the condition that the logical decision PE11 is affirmative, the counting operation BC1T is performed based on the measurement time length value CL1T.
  • the method MT10 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the trigger event EQ11, the counting operation BC1T is used to reach the destination. The specific time TJ1T; and within the specific time TJ1T, a third control signal SC22 that is different from the first control signal SC11 is generated. The third control signal SC22 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the method MT10 further includes the following steps: providing a sensing unit 334, wherein the step of sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A is performed by using the sensing unit 334; and executing and The physical parameter application range RD1EL is related to a measurement application function FC11.
  • the measurement application function FC11 is configured to comply with a measurement application function specification GCL1 related to the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a sensor specification FU11 related to the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor measurement range representation GW1R for representing a sensor measurement range RB1E, and a sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW11.
  • the sensor sensitivity YW11 is related to a sensing signal generated by the sensing unit 334 to generate HF11.
  • the first measurement value VN11 is obtained in a designated measurement value format HH11.
  • the specified measurement value format HH11 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UY11.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on a rated physical parameter range RD1E.
  • the rated physical parameter range RD1E is represented by a rated measurement value range RD1N, and includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ... represented by a plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... .
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are both included in the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes the sensor specification FU11, a rated physical parameter range representation GC1E for representing the rated physical parameter range RD1E, and a physical parameter application range representing the physical parameter application range RD1EL Represents GC1L.
  • the rated measurement value range RD1N is based on the rated physical parameter range representing GC1E, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, and a first data encoding operation ZX11 for converting the rated physical parameter range representing GC1E to use the specified measurement
  • the value format HH11 is preset, has a rated range limit value pair DD1A, and includes the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, RN11, RN12, and RN11, RN12, and RN12, respectively, represented by multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... ....
  • the rated range limit value pair DD1A is preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... include the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L is represented by a measurement value application range code EM1L included in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ..., and has an application range limit value pair DN1L.
  • the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... are all defaulted based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the application range limit value pair DN1L includes a first application range limit value DN15 and a second application range limit value DN16 relative to the first application range limit value DN15, and the application range based on the physical parameter indicates GC1L,
  • the sensor measurement range representation GW1R and a second data encoding operation ZX12 for converting the physical parameter application range representation GC1L are preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the method MT10 further includes the following steps: providing a storage space SS11; and storing the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A and a variable physical parameter range code in the storage space SS11 UN1A.
  • the variable physical parameter range code UN1A is equal to a specific measurement value range code EM14 selected from the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12,...
  • the specific measurement value range code EM14 indicates a specific physical parameter range RD1E4 previously determined based on a sensing operation ZS11.
  • the specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is selected from the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,....
  • the sensing operation ZS11 performed by the sensing unit 334 is used to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the specific measurement value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the method MT10 further includes the following steps: responding to the trigger event EQ11, providing an operation request signal SX11; under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, responding to the operation request signal SX11 to receive
  • the storage space SS11 obtains an operation reference data code XU11; and by running a data determination program NA1A, executes a data determination AA1A using the operation reference data code XU11 to determine the reference range codes selected from the multiple different measurement values
  • the measurement value application range code EM1L of EM11, EM12, ... is used to select the measurement value application range RN1L from the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ....
  • the operation reference data code XU11 is the same as an allowable reference data code that is defaulted based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the data determination program NA1A is constructed based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the data determination AA1A is one of a first data determination operation AA11 and a second data determination operation AA12.
  • the data determination AA1A of the first data determination operation AA11 determines the measurement value application range code EM1L based on the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14, wherein the determined measurement value application range code EM1L is the same Or different from the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14.
  • the operation reference data code XU11 is obtained by accessing the rated range limit value pair DD1A stored in the storage space SS11 to obtain the same conditions as the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A Next, it is the data determination AA1A of the second data determination operation AA12 by performing a scientific calculation MR11 using the first measurement value VN11 and the obtained rated range limit value pair DD1A to obtain the data from the multiple
  • the measurement value application range code EM1L is selected from two different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... to determine the measurement value application range code EM1L.
  • the scientific calculation MR11 is executed based on a specific empirical formula XR11, and the specific empirical formula XR11 is based on the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A and the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12,...and is pre-defined.
  • the method MT10 further includes a step of obtaining the application range limit value pair DN1L based on the determined application range code EM1L of the measured value.
  • the step of generating the first control signal SC11 includes the following sub-steps: based on a data comparison CD11 between the first measured value VN11 and the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L, checking the first mathematical relationship KV11 to make a logical decision PB11 whether the first measurement value VN11 is within the selected measurement value application range RN1L; and under the condition that the logical decision PB11 is affirmative, determine the variable The physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A exists in a control target device 330.
  • the trigger event EQ11 is one of a trigger action event, a user input event, a signal input event, a state change event, and a recognition medium appearance event, and is applied to the measurement application function FC11.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 further includes a physical parameter representing GC1T1.
  • the physical parameter representation GC1T1 is used to represent a designated physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the preset measurement value application range code EM1L is related to a control data code CK1T.
  • the control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC1T1 and a third data encoding operation ZX21 for converting the physical parameter representation GC1T1.
  • the method MT10 further includes a step: under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 of the trigger action event is about to occur, by using the control target device 330 to execute a variable related to the variable physical parameter QU1A Specific function operation ZH11.
  • the specific function operation ZH11 is used to cause the triggering event to occur.
  • the step of generating the first control signal SC11 further includes the following sub-steps: under the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL is determined, the control data code CK1T is obtained based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L And based on the obtained control data code CK1T, execute a signal generation control GS11 for the measurement application function FC11 to generate the first control signal SC11, and the first control signal SC11 is used to cause the The variable physical parameter QU1A leaves the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... further include a measurement value target range RN1T that is different from the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 further includes a physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T for representing the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the measurement value target range RN1T is represented by a measurement value target range code EM1T that is different from the measurement value application range code EM1L, has a target range limit value pair DN1T, and is configured to represent the physical parameter target range RD1ET .
  • the measurement value target range code EM1T is included in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12,...
  • the target range limit value pair DN1T is based on the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, and a fourth data encoding operation ZX13 for converting the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T.
  • the specified measurement value format HH11 is preset.
  • the method MT10 further includes the following steps: after the signal generation control GS11 is executed within an operating time TD11, sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sensing signal SN12; within a specified time TG12 after the operating time TD11, respond to the second sensing signal SN12 to obtain a second measured value VN12; and under the condition that the signal generation control GS11 is executed, based on One of the obtained control data code CK1T and the determined measurement value application range code EM1L is used to determine the measurement value target range code EM1T.
  • the method MT10 further includes the following steps: obtaining the target range limit value pair DN1T based on the determined measurement value target range code EM1T; and when the specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from the determined measurement value Value target range code EM1T and the physical parameter target range RD1ET in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located within the specified time TG12 by comparing the second measured value VN12 with the target range limit obtained Under the condition that the value is determined for DN1T, based on a code difference DF11 between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 and the determined measurement value target range code EM1T The determined target range code EM1T of the measured value is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the method MT10 further includes the following steps: when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, a first status indicator LB11 is displayed, wherein the first status indicator LB11 is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured in the specific A first specific state XJ11 within the physical parameter range RD1E4; and when the specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from the determined measurement value target range code EM1T and the physical parameter target range RD1ET is at the specified time Under the condition that TG12 is determined by comparing the second measured value VN12 with the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T, the first status indicator LB11 is changed to a first state indicator LB11 based on the code difference DF11
  • the second state indicates LB12.
  • the second state indication LB12 is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured in a second specific state XJ12 within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8017 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1. Please refer to Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3, Figure 4, Figure 5, Figure 6 and Figure 7 additionally.
  • a method MT12 for controlling a variable physical parameter QU1A by generating a first control signal SC11 within a first operating time TD11 is disclosed.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L and a physical parameter target range RD1ET different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the method MT12 includes the following steps: the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN11; when a trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 responds to all The first sensing signal SN11 is used to obtain a first measurement value VN11; and the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located is checked by checking the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value Under the condition that a first mathematical relationship KV11 between the application ranges RN1L is determined by the processing unit 230, the processing unit 230 determines whether a first trigger signal WX11 for reaching the first operating time TD11 is required A reasonable decision PW11 is additionally generated, and the first control signal SC11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the step of making the reasonable decision PW11 includes the following sub-steps: under the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL is determined by the processing unit 230, the processing unit 230 performs a check for the determined A first range relationship KC1A between the physical parameter application range RD1EL and a preset physical parameter range RD1EF is a first inspection operation ZY11; the processing unit 230 performs the calculation based on the first inspection operation ZY11 Whether the determined physical parameter application range RD1EL is the same as a first specific decision PD11 of the preset physical parameter range RD1EF; and under the condition that the first specific decision PD11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 makes The reasonable decision PW11 is to be affirmative.
  • the first trigger signal WX11 is one of an interrupt request signal and a state change control signal.
  • the first control signal SC11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET is represented by a measured value target range RN1T, and is the same as or different from a first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.
  • the measured value target range RN1T has a target range limit value pair DN1T.
  • the target range limit value is preset for DN1T.
  • Both the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL are included in a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the method MT12 further includes a step: the control device 210 provides a sensing unit 334.
  • the step of sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A is performed by using the sensing unit 334.
  • the sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a sensor specification FU11 related to the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor measurement range representation GW1R for representing a sensor measurement range RB1E, and a sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW11.
  • the sensor sensitivity YW11 is related to a sensing signal generated by the sensing unit 334 to generate HF11.
  • the first measurement value VN11 is obtained by the processing unit 230 in a designated measurement value format HH11.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L and a measurement value candidate range RN12 representing the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are both based on one of the sensor measurement range representation GW1R and the sensor specification FU11 to use the specified measurement
  • the value format HH11 is preset.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L has an application range limit value pair DN1L.
  • the application range limit value is preset for DN1L.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12 has a candidate range limit value pair DN1B.
  • the candidate range limit value is preset for DN1B.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L; and the processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11, Obtain a control data code CK1T preset based on a designated physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET; and under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is negative, the processing unit 230 directly The first operation time TD11, which is independent of the first trigger signal WX11, is reached.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is affirmative, one of the control device 210 and the operating unit 297 responds to a first related to the variable physical parameter QU1A
  • the specific application operates ZA11 to generate the first trigger signal WX11; under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 responds to the first trigger signal WX11 to reach the first trigger signal WX11 And the processing unit 230 executes a signal generation control GS11 within the first operation time TD11 based on the obtained control data code CK1T to generate the first control The signal SC11.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL is configured to correspond to a corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL outside the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located is determined by the processing unit 230 by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11, The processing unit 230 obtains the default candidate range limit value pair DN1B; and the processing unit 230 performs a data comparison CD21 between the first measured value VN11 and the obtained candidate range limit value pair DN1B .
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 where the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located is determined by the processing unit 230 based on the data comparison CD21, the processing The unit 230 performs a second check operation ZY21 for checking a second range relationship KC2A between the determined first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the preset physical parameter range RD1EF; the processing unit 230 is based on The second check operation ZY21 makes a second specific decision PW21 whether a second trigger signal WX21 for reaching a second operation time TD21 is to be additionally generated, wherein a second specific decision PW21 is different from the first control signal SC11 A second control signal SC12 is to be generated within the second operating time TD21; and under the condition that the second specific decision PW21 is negative, the processing unit 230 directly reaches independently of the second trigger The second operation time TD21 of the signal WX21.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the second specific decision PW21 is affirmative, one of the control device 210 and the operating unit 297 responds to the one related to the variable physical parameter QU1A
  • the second specific application operates ZA21 to generate the second trigger signal WX21; under the condition that the second specific decision PW21 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 responds to the second trigger signal WX21 to reach the second trigger signal WX21.
  • the second control signal SC12 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 to enter a second one included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ... Physical parameter candidate range RD1E3.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain the default target range limit value pair DN1T; After being executed by the processing unit 230 within the operating time TD11, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sensing signal SN12.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 responds to the second sensing signal SN12 within a specified time TG12 after the operating time TD11 to obtain a first measurement value format HH11 in the specified measurement value format HH11. Two measurement values VN12; and the target range of the physical parameter RD1ET in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located within the specified time TG12 by comparing the second measurement value VN12 with the target range obtained Under the condition that the threshold value is DN1T and is determined by the processing unit 230, the processing unit 230 performs a data storage control operation GU11, and the data storage control operation GU11 is configured to represent the determined target range RD1ET of the physical parameter A physical parameter target range code UN1T of is recorded by the storage unit 250.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is related to a variable time length LF1A.
  • the variable time length LF1A is characterized based on a time length reference range HJ11 and a reference time length LJ1T.
  • the time length reference range HJ11 is represented by a measurement time length value reference range GJ11.
  • the reference time length LJ1T is represented by a measured time length value CL1T.
  • the obtained control data code CK1T includes the measurement time length value CL1T.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 checks a numerical relationship KJ11 between the measurement time length value CL1T and the measurement time length value reference range GJ11 to make a control for a specific time TJ1T A logical decision PE11 is whether a counting operation BC1T is to be executed; and under the condition that the logical decision PE11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 executes the counting operation BC1T based on the measured time length value CL1T.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the trigger event EQ11, the processing unit 230 is based on the count Operate BC1T to reach the specific time TJ1T; and within the specific time TJ1T, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate a third control signal SC22 that is different from the first control signal SC11.
  • the third control signal SC22 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the control device 210 provides a sensing unit 334, wherein the step of sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A is performed by using the sensing unit 334 Execute; and the operating unit 297 executes a measurement application function FC11 related to the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the measurement application function FC11 is configured to comply with a measurement application function specification GCL1 related to the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with a sensor specification FU11 related to the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the sensor specification FU11 includes a sensor measurement range representation GW1R for representing a sensor measurement range RB1E, and a sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing a sensor sensitivity YW11.
  • the sensor sensitivity YW11 is related to a sensing signal generated by the sensing unit 334 to generate HF11.
  • the specified measurement value format HH11 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UY11.
  • the first measurement value VN11 is obtained by the processing unit 230 in a designated measurement value format HH11.
  • the specified measurement value format HH11 is characterized based on a specified number of bits UY11.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to perform the sensing signal generation HF11 dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW11, and the sensing signal generation HF11 is used to generate the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on a rated physical parameter range RD1E.
  • the rated physical parameter range RD1E is represented by a rated measurement value range RD1N, and includes a plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ... represented by a plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... .
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are both included in the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes the sensor specification FU11, a rated physical parameter range representation GC1E for representing the rated physical parameter range RD1E, and a physical parameter application range representing the physical parameter application range RD1EL Represents GC1L.
  • the rated measurement value range RD1N is based on the rated physical parameter range representing GC1E, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, and a first data encoding operation ZX11 for converting the rated physical parameter range representing GC1E It is preset using the specified measurement value format HH11, has a rated range limit value pair DD1A, and contains the multiple different measurement values represented by multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... Reference range RN11, RN12,....
  • the rated range limit value pair DD1A is preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... include the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L is represented by a measurement value application range code EM1L included in the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ..., and has an application range limit value pair DN1L; thereby
  • the measurement value application range code EM1L is configured to indicate the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... are all defaulted based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the application range limit value pair DN1L includes a first application range limit value DN15 of the measurement value application range RN1L and a second application range limit value DN16 relative to the first application range limit value DN15, and is based on all
  • the physical parameter application range represents GC1L
  • the sensor measurement range represents GW1R
  • a second data encoding operation ZX12 for converting the physical parameter application range represents GC1L is preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L is preset based on the physical parameter application range representation GC1L, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, and the second data encoding operation ZX12 using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the storage unit 250 provides a storage space SS11; and the storage unit 250 stores the preset limit value of the rated range in the storage space SS11 For DD1A and a variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the variable physical parameter range code UN1A is equal to a specific measurement value range code EM14 selected from the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12,...
  • the specific measurement value range code EM14 indicates a first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 previously determined by the processing unit 230 based on a sensing operation ZS11.
  • the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is selected from the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,....
  • the sensing operation ZS11 performed by the sensing unit 334 is used to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the specific measurement value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the specific measurement value range code EM14. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 based on the sensing operation ZS11 before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to The obtained specific measurement value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the specific measurement value range code EM14 represents a specific measurement value range configured to represent the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4.
  • the specific measurement value range is preset in the specified measurement value format HH11 based on one of the sensor measurement range indication GW1R and the sensor specification FU11.
  • the sensing unit 334 performs a sensing signal generation dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW11 by performing the sensing operation ZS11 to generate a sensing signal.
  • the processing unit 230 receives the sensing signal, responds to the sensing signal to obtain a specific measurement value in the specified measurement value format HH11, and executes a method for checking the specific measurement value.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to The obtained specific measurement value range code EM14 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the processing unit 230 determines whether the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to change the variable physical parameter range code UN1A in response to a specific sensing operation for sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the specific sensing operation is performed by the sensing unit 334.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: in response to the trigger event EQ11 related to the trigger application unit 281, providing an operation request signal SX11 to the processing unit 230; in the trigger event EQ11 Under the condition that occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains an operation reference data code XU11 from the storage space SS11 in response to the operation request signal SX11; and the processing unit 230 executes the used data by running a data determination program NA1A
  • a data of the operation reference data code XU11 determines AA1A to determine the measurement value application range code EM1L selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... in order to obtain a reference range from the plurality of different measurement values Select the measurement value application range RN1L from RN11, RN12,...
  • the operation reference data code XU11 is the same as an allowable reference data code that is defaulted based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the data determination program NA1A is constructed based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the data determination AA1A is one of a first data determination operation AA11 and a second data determination operation AA12.
  • the operation reference data code XU11 is obtained by the processing unit 230 by accessing the variable physical parameter range code UN1A stored in the storage space SS11 to be the same as the specific measurement value range code EM14 Under the condition of, it is the data determination AA1A of the first data determination operation AA11 that determines the measurement value application range code EM1L based on the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14.
  • the determined measurement value application range code EM1L is the same as or different from the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14.
  • the operation reference data code XU11 is obtained by the processing unit 230 by accessing the rated range limit value pair DD1A stored in the storage space SS11 to be the same as the preset rated range limit Under the condition of the value pair DD1A, the data of the second data determining operation AA12 determines AA1A by performing a first scientific analysis of DD1A using the first measured value VN11 and the obtained rated range limit value.
  • MR11 is calculated to select the measurement value application range code EM1L from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... to determine the measurement value application range code EM1L. For example, the first scientific calculation MR11 is executed based on a specific empirical formula XR11.
  • the specific empirical formula XR11 is formulated in advance based on the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A and the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12,...
  • the specific empirical formula XR11 is formulated in advance based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the method MT12 further includes a step: the processing unit 230 obtains the application range limit value pair DN1L based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L.
  • the step of making the reasonable decision PW11 includes the following sub-steps: the processing unit 230 compares a first data CD11 between DN1L based on the first measured value VN11 and the obtained application range limit value, and checks The first mathematical relationship KV11 is used to determine whether the first measurement value VN11 is a first logical decision PB11 within the selected measurement value application range RN1L; and whether the first logical decision PB11 is Under a positive condition, the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located.
  • the processing unit 230 makes the first logical decision PB11 by comparing the first measured value VN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L to become affirmative. Under the condition that the first application range limit value DN15, the second application range limit value DN16, and the first measurement value VN11 are equal, the processing unit 230 compares the first measurement value VN11 with The obtained application range limit value is affirmative for DN1L to make the first logical decision PB11.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A exists in a control target device 330.
  • the trigger event EQ11 is one of a trigger action event, a user input event, a signal input event, a state change event, and a recognition medium appearance event, and is applied to the measurement application function FC11.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 further includes a physical parameter representing GC1T1.
  • the physical parameter representation GC1T1 is used to represent a designated physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the method MT12 further includes a step: under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 of the trigger action event is about to occur, by using the control target device 330 to execute a variable related to the variable physical parameter QU1A Specific function operation ZH11.
  • the specific function operation ZH11 is used to cause the triggering event to occur.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the operating unit 297 provides a response area AC1 for executing the measurement application function FC11; and the memory unit 25Y1 provides a memory space SA1 related to the measurement application function FC11 .
  • the memory space SA1 has a first memory location PN1L and a second memory location PX1L different from the first memory location PN1L. Both the first memory location PN1L and the second memory location PX1L are identified based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L.
  • the storage space SS11 includes the memory space SA1.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the memory unit 25Y1 stores the application range limit value pair DN1L in the first memory location PN1L; and the memory unit 25Y1 stores a control data in the second memory location PX1L Code CK1T.
  • the control data code CK1T includes a control code CC1T.
  • the control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC1T1 and a third data encoding operation ZX21 for converting the physical parameter representation GC1T1.
  • the application range limit value pair DN1L and the control data code CK1T are stored by the memory unit 25Y1 based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L.
  • the step of obtaining the application range limit value pair DN1L includes a sub-step: the processing unit 230 runs a data obtaining program ND1A to execute the operation using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L
  • a data acquisition AD1A to obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L is one of a first data acquisition operation AD11 and a second data acquisition operation AD12.
  • the data acquisition program ND1A is constructed based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the first data acquisition operation AD11 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the application range limit value pair DN1L stored in the first memory location PN1L based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L Obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L.
  • the second data obtaining operation AD12 obtains the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A by reading the rated range limit value pair DD1A stored in the storage space SS11, and uses it by executing The determined measurement value application range code EM1L and a second scientific calculation MZ11 of the obtained rated range limit value pair DD1A are used to obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L.
  • the rated range limit value pair DD1A includes a rated range limit value DD11 of the rated measurement value range RD1N and a rated range limit value DD12 relative to the rated range limit value DD11, and is based on the rated physical parameter
  • the range represents GC1E
  • the sensor measurement range represents GW1R
  • the first data encoding operation ZX11 is preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is negative, the processing unit 230 directly reaches the first operation independent of the first trigger signal WX11 Time TD11; under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is affirmative, one of the control device and the operation unit 297 responds to a specific application operation ZA11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first A trigger signal WX11; under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 responds to the first trigger signal WX11 to reach the first operation time TD11 dependent on the first trigger signal WX11; And the processing unit 230 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the memory unit 25Y1 stored in the second memory location PX1L based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L within the first operating time TD11 The control data code CK1T.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 executes a signal generation for the measurement application function FC11 based on the accessed control data code CK1T within the first operation time TD11 Control GS11 to control the output unit 240; and in response to the signal generation control GS11, the output unit 240 executes a first signal generation operation BS11 for the measurement application function FC11 to be at the first operation time TD11
  • the first control signal SC11 is generated within.
  • the first control signal SC11 conveys the control code CC1T, and is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... further include a measurement value target range RN1T that is different from the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 further includes a first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T for representing the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the measurement value target range RN1T is represented by a measurement value target range code EM1T that is different from the measurement value application range code EM1L, has a target range limit value pair DN1T, and is configured to represent the physical parameter target range RD1ET ; Thereby the measured value target range code EM1T is configured to indicate the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the measurement value target range code EM1T is included in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12,...
  • the target range limit value pair DN1T is based on the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, and a fourth data encoding operation ZX13 for converting the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T.
  • the specified measurement value format HH11 is preset.
  • the measurement value target range RN1T is preset based on the first physical parameter candidate range representation GC1T, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, and the fourth data encoding operation ZX13 using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the total number of reference ranges NT11 is defaulted based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the method MT12 further includes a step: the processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain the total reference range number NT11.
  • the first scientific calculation MR11 further uses the obtained total reference range number NT11.
  • the second scientific calculation MZ11 further uses the obtained total reference range number NT11.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: by using a control target device 330, receiving the first control signal SC11; by using the control target device 330, obtaining all the signals from the received first control signal SC11 The control code CC1T; and by using the control target device 330, the variable physical parameter QU1A is changed from a first specific physical parameter QU13 to a second specific physical parameter QU14 based on the obtained control code CC1T .
  • the first specific physical parameter QU13 is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the second specific physical parameter QU14 is within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the control target device 330 is coupled to the output unit 240.
  • the control target device 330 is installed on the control device 210 or supported by the control device 210.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L is a first part of the rated measurement value range RD1N.
  • the measured value target range RN1T is a second part of the rated measured value range RD1N.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are separate or adjacent. Under the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are separated, the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value target range RN1T are separated. Under the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are adjacent, the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value target range RN1T are adjacent.
  • the measurement value application range code EM1L is configured to be equal to an integer.
  • the rated range limit value DD12 is greater than the rated range limit value DD11.
  • the relative value VA11 is equal to a calculation result of the rated range limit value DD12 minus the rated range limit value DD11.
  • the application range limit value pair DN1L is determined based on the rated range limit value DD11, the rated range limit value DD12, the integer, and a ratio of the relative value VA11 to the total reference range number NT11 Preset.
  • the second scientific calculation MZ11 uses one of the rated range limit value DD11, the rated range limit value DD12, the integer, the ratio, and any combination thereof.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET is the same or different from a first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the measurement value target range RN1T is the same or different from a measurement value candidate range RN12 included in the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12,...
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12 is different from the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 further includes a second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12 for representing the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12 is represented by a measurement value candidate range code EM12 that is different from the measurement value application range code EM1L, has a candidate range threshold pair DN1B, and is configured to represent the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 ; Thereby the measured value candidate range code EM12 is configured to indicate the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.
  • the candidate range threshold value pair DN1B is based on the second physical parameter candidate range representing GC12, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, and a fifth data code used to transform the second physical parameter candidate range representing GC12 Operate ZX14 to be preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12 is preset in the designated measurement value format HH11 based on the second physical parameter candidate range representation GC12, the sensor measurement range representation GW1R, and the fifth data encoding operation ZX14.
  • the method MT12 further includes a step: under the condition that the first logic determines that PB11 is negative, the processing unit 230 executes a third scientific calculation MR21 using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L To determine the measurement value candidate range code EM12 selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... so as to select the measurement value from the plurality of different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... Candidate range RN12.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 obtains the candidate range limit value pair DN1B based on the determined measurement value candidate range code EM12; and the processing unit 230 based on the first measurement value Compare CD21 with a second data between VN11 and the obtained candidate range threshold value pair DN1B, and check a second mathematical relationship between the first measurement value VN11 and the selected measurement value candidate range RN12 KV21 is used to make a second logical decision PB21 whether the first measurement value VN11 is within the selected measurement value candidate range RN12.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the second logical decision PB21 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 determines the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located; and Under the condition that the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is determined by the processing unit 230, the processing unit 230 performs a second signal generation operation BS21 for the measurement application function FC11 to generate a second signal generation operation BS21 that is different from the first physical parameter A second control signal SC12 of a control signal SC11.
  • the second control signal SC12 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 to enter a second one included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ... Physical parameter candidate range RD1E3.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: after the signal generation control GS11 is executed by the processing unit 230 within an operating time TD11, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable The physical parameter QU1A is used to generate a second sensing signal SN12; the processing unit 230 responds to the second sensing signal SN12 within a designated time TG12 after the operating time TD11 to use the designated measurement value format HH11 obtains a second measured value VN12; and under the condition that the signal generation control GS11 is executed by the processing unit 230, the processing unit 230 is based on the accessed control data code CK1T and the determined One of the measurement value application range codes EM1L is used to determine the measurement value target range code EM1T to determine the measurement value target range RN1T.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 obtains the target range limit value pair DN1T based on the determined measurement value target range code EM1T; and the processing unit 230 obtains the target range limit value pair DN1T based on the second measurement value Compare CD22 with a third data between VN12 and the obtained target range limit value pair DN1T, and check a third mathematical relationship between the second measured value VN12 and the determined target range of measured value RN1T KV22 is used to make a third logical decision PB22 whether the second measurement value VN12 is within the determined target range RN1T of the measurement value.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to perform a sensing signal generation HF12 dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW11, so The sensing signal generating HF12 is used to generate the second sensing signal SN12.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: under the condition that the third logical decision PB22 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 determines within the specified time TG12 that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical Parameter target range RD1ET; and when the specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from the determined measurement value target range code EM1T and the physical parameter target range RD1ET is determined by making the third logical decision PB22 Under the condition determined by the processing unit 230, the processing unit 230 is based on one between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 and the determined measurement value target range code EM1T.
  • the first code difference DF11 is used to assign the determined measurement value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: when the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the output unit 240 displays a first status indicator LB11, wherein the first status indicator LB11 is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter QU1A is A first specific state XJ11 configured within the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4; and the specific measurement value range code EM14 is different from the determined measurement value target range code EM1T and the physical parameter target Under the condition that the range RD1ET is determined by the processing unit 230 by making the third logical decision PB22, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to convert the first code difference DF11
  • the status indicator LB11 changes to a second status indicator LB12.
  • the second state indication LB12 is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured in a second specific state XJ12 within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the step of obtaining the first measurement value VN11 includes a sub-step: when the trigger event EQ11 is the identification medium occurrence event and an identification medium 310 appearing in the response area AC1 is detected by the Under the condition identified by the processing unit 230, the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VN11 based on the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the method MT12 further includes a step: under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the trigger event EQ11, the input unit 270 receives a user input operation BQ11.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 determines a specific input code UW11 in response to the user input operation BQ11, wherein the specific input code UW11 is selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12,...; and under the condition that the specific input code UW11 is different from the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, the processing unit 230 is based on all values equal to the determined measurement value target range code EM1T A second code difference DX11 between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A and the specific input code UW11 causes the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the multiple different A second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 in the physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the step of sensing the variable physical parameter QU1A includes a sub-step: under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the sensing unit 334 senses the available condition FR11 under a constraint condition FR11.
  • the physical parameter QU1A is changed to provide the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the constraint condition FR11 is that the variable physical parameter QU1A is equal to a third specific physical parameter QU11 included in the rated physical parameter range RD1E.
  • the step of obtaining the first measurement value VN11 includes a sub-step: the processing unit 230 estimates the third specific physical parameter QU11 based on the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11.
  • the processing unit 230 recognizes that the first measurement value VN11 is within the measurement value application range RN1L A permissible value within, thereby identifying that the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L is a numerical intersection relationship, and thereby determining the variable physical The physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the parameter QU1A is currently located.
  • the sensing unit 334 is characterized based on the sensor sensitivity YW11 related to the sensing signal generation HF11, and is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU11.
  • the sensor specification FU11 includes the sensor sensitivity representation GW11 for representing the sensor sensitivity YW11, and a sensor measurement range representation GW1R for representing a sensor measurement range RB1E.
  • the rated physical parameter range RD1E is configured to be the same as the sensor measurement range RB1E, or configured to be a part of the sensor measurement range RB1E.
  • the sensor measurement range RB1E is related to a physical parameter sensing performed by the sensing unit 334.
  • the sensor measurement range means that GW1R is provided based on a first default measurement unit.
  • the first default measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit.
  • the rated measurement value range RD1N and the rated range limit value pair DD1A are based on the rated physical parameter range representing GC1E, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representing GW11, and the first data encoding operation ZX11 To use the specified measurement value format HH11 and be preset.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L and the application range limit value pair DN1L are both based on the physical parameter application range representing GC1L, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representing GW11, and the second data encoding operation ZX12 To use the specified measurement value format HH11 and be preset.
  • the measurement value target range RN1T and the target range limit value pair DN1T are based on the first physical parameter candidate range representing GC1T, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representing GW11, and the fourth data code Operate ZX13 to be preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12 and the candidate range limit value pair DN1B are based on the second physical parameter candidate range representing GC12, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representing GW11, and the fifth data code Operate ZX14 to be preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the rated physical parameter range represents GC1E
  • the physical parameter application range represents GC1L
  • the physical parameter represents GC1T1
  • the first physical parameter candidate range represents GC1T
  • the second physical parameter candidate range represents GC12.
  • Two default measurement units are provided.
  • the second default measurement unit is one of a metric measurement unit and an imperial measurement unit, and is the same as or different from the first default measurement unit.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the sensor measurement range RB1E.
  • the sensor measurement range represents GW1R
  • the rated physical parameter range represents GC1E
  • the physical parameter application range represents GC1L
  • the first physical parameter candidate range represents GC1T
  • the second physical parameter candidate range represents GC12 and
  • the physical parameters indicate that GC1T1 all belong to the decimal data type.
  • the first measurement value VN11, the second measurement value VN12, the rated range limit value pair DD1A, the application range limit value pair DN1L, the target range limit value pair DN1T, the candidate range limit value pair Both DN1B and the control code CC1T belong to the binary data type, and both are suitable for computer processing.
  • the sensor specification FU11 and the measurement application function specification GCL1 are both defaulted.
  • the first memory location PN1L is identified based on a first memory address FN1L.
  • the first memory address FN1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L.
  • the second memory location PX1L is identified based on a second memory address FX1L.
  • the second memory address FX1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the default measurement value application range code EM1L, the preset application range limit value pair DN1L and the The default control data code CK1T; the processing unit 230 obtains the first memory address FN1L based on the obtained measurement value application range code EM1L; and before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230, based on the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L and the obtained first memory address FN1L to provide the transmission of the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L and the obtained first memory address FN1L A first write request message WD1L.
  • the first write request information WD1L is used to store the delivered application range limit value pair DN1L in the first memory location PN1L.
  • the method MT12 further includes the following steps: the processing unit 230 obtains the second memory address FX1L based on the obtained measurement value application range code EM1L; and before the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230, based on the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained second memory address FX1L, provides a second write of the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained second memory address FX1L. Enter the request information WC1L.
  • the second write request information WC1L is used to store the transferred control data code CK1T in the second memory location PX1L.
  • the identification medium 310 is one of an electronic tag 350, a barcode medium 360, and a biometric identification medium 370.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8018 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8018 includes the identification medium 310, the control device 210, the control target device 330 and the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297, and the Storage unit 250.
  • the operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the response area AC1, the reader 220, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280, the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the reader 220, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the reader 220, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240 are all controlled by the processing unit 230.
  • the trigger event EQ11 is the occurrence of the identification medium 310 in the response area AC1.
  • the measurement application function FC11 is an identification application function.
  • the response area AC1 is used to execute the measurement application function FC11.
  • the reader 220 is coupled to the response area AC1 and the processing unit 230.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the processing unit 230 receives the first sensing signal SN11, and responds to the trigger event EQ11 to process the received first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11. For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 recognizes the identification medium 310 appearing in the response area AC1 through the reader 220, the processing unit 230 processes the received first sensing The signal SN11 is used to obtain the first measurement value VN11.
  • the identification medium 310 is identified by an identification medium identifier HU11, records the application range limit value pair DN1L and the control data code CK1T, and is the electronic tag 350, the barcode medium 360 and the biometric identification One of the role media 370.
  • the reader 220 reads the identification medium 310 by performing a reading operation BX11 for the identification application function to obtain a Read data DB11.
  • the processing unit 230 determines an identification medium identification code CU11 equal to the identification medium identifier HU11 based on the read data DB11, and thereby identifies the identification medium 310.
  • the reader 220 is the trigger application unit 281, generates the operation request signal SX11 in response to the trigger event EQ11 related to the identification medium 310, and provides the operation request signal SX11 to the processing Unit 230, and thereby enable the processing unit 230 to receive the operation request signal SX11.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SX11 to make the reader 220 read the recorded application range limit value pair DN1L and the recorded control data code CK1T, and thereby pass the The reader 220 obtains the recorded application range limit value pair DN1L and the recorded control data code CK1T from the identification medium 310.
  • the processing unit 230 executes the first math for checking the relationship between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located based on the checking operation BV11, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the first A control signal SC11.
  • the first control signal SC11 is one of a pulse width modulation signal, a level signal, a driving signal, and a command signal.
  • the implementation structure 8018 further includes a control target device 630.
  • the control device 210 is identified by a control device identifier HAOT, and is used to control the control target device 630.
  • the output unit 240 has an output terminal 240P and an output terminal 240Q; thereby, the operating unit 297 has the output terminal 240P and the output terminal 240Q.
  • the output terminal 240P and the output terminal 240Q are respectively located at different spatial positions.
  • the control target device 330 is coupled to the output terminal 240P and is identified by a control target device identifier HA1T.
  • the control target device 630 is coupled to the output terminal 240Q and is identified by a control target device identifier HA12.
  • control device identifier HAOT is a control device number and is defaulted.
  • the control target device identifier HA1T is configured to indicate that the output terminal 240P is a first control target device number and is defaulted.
  • the control target device identifier HA12 is configured to indicate that the output terminal 240Q is a second control target device number and is defaulted.
  • the first memory location PN1L is identified based on the first memory address FN1L.
  • the first memory address FN1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L and the default control target device identifier HA1T.
  • the second memory location PX1L is identified based on the second memory address FX1L.
  • the second memory address FX1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L and the default control target device identifier HA12.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the default control target device identifier HA1T in response to the trigger event EQ11.
  • the first data obtaining operation AD11 obtains the first memory address FN1L based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the determined measurement value application range code EM1L, and based on the obtained first memory address FN1L
  • a memory address FN1L is used to use the memory unit 25Y1 to access the preset application range limit value pair DN1L stored in the first memory location PN1L.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in, the processing unit 230 is based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the determined all
  • the measurement value application range code EM1L is used to obtain the second memory address FX1L, and based on the obtained second memory address FX1L, the memory unit 25Y1 is used to access the memory unit 25Y1 stored in the second memory location PX1L
  • the control data code CK1T is used to access the memory unit 25Y1 stored in the second memory location PX1L.
  • the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 for the measurement application function FC11 based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the obtained control data code CK1T to control the output unit 240.
  • the signal generation control GS11 plays a role of instructing the output terminal 240P, and is used to cause the processing unit 230 to provide a control signal SH11 to the output unit 240.
  • the control signal SH11 plays a role of instructing the output terminal 240P.
  • the output unit 240 responds to one of the signal generation control GS11 and the control signal SH11 to perform the signal generation operation BS11 using the output terminal 240P to transmit the first control signal to the control target device 330 Control signal SC11.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the default control device identifier HAOT.
  • the first control signal SC11 includes at least one of the obtained control device identifier HA0T, the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, and the obtained control code CC1T.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the default control target device identifier HA12 in response to a trigger event EQ21, and passes the output terminal 240Q based on the obtained control target device identifier HA12
  • a control signal SC19 is transmitted to the control target device 630.
  • the control signal SC19 is used to control the control target device 630.
  • the trigger event EQ21 is related to the trigger application unit 281.
  • the trigger application unit 281 generates an operation request signal SX21 in response to the trigger event EQ21, and provides the operation request signal SX21 to the processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 receives the operation request signal SX21, and obtains the default control target device identifier HA12 in response to the operation request signal SX21.
  • the storage unit 250 stores the default control device identifier HAOT, the default control target device identifier HA1T, and the default control target device identifier HA12.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the default control device identifier HAOT from the storage unit 250.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the default control target device identifier HA1T from the storage unit 250 in response to the trigger event EQ11.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the default control target device identifier HA12 from the storage unit 250 in response to the trigger event EQ21.
  • the storage unit 250 has a first application memory location and a second application memory location, and stores the rated range limit value pair DD1A in the first application memory location, and stores it in the second application memory location.
  • the variable physical parameter range code is UN1A.
  • the first application memory location is identified by a first application memory address, or is identified based on the first application memory address.
  • the second application memory location is identified by a second application memory address, or is identified based on the second application memory address.
  • the first application memory address and the second application memory address are preset based on the default control target device identifier HA1T.
  • the second data obtaining operation AD12 obtains the first application memory address based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, and uses the obtained first application memory address based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T.
  • the storage unit 250 reads the rated range limit value pair DD1A stored in the first application memory location to obtain the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the second application memory address based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, and to use the storage unit 250 based on the obtained second application memory address. Access the variable physical parameter range code UN1A stored in the memory location of the second application.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET has a default physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 and a default physical parameter target range limit ZD1T2 relative to the default physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1.
  • the target range limit value pair DN1T includes a target range limit value DN17 of the measured value target range RN1T and a target range limit value DN18 relative to the target range limit value DN17.
  • the default physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 is represented by the target range limit value DN17.
  • the default physical parameter target range limit ZD1T2 is represented by the target range limit value DN18.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8019 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8019 includes the control device 210, the control target device 330, and the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297, and the Storage unit 250.
  • the operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280, the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 is located at one of the inside of the control device 210 and the outside of the control device 210. Under the condition that the control target device 330 is located inside the control device 210, the control device 210 includes the control target device 330.
  • the measurement application function FC11 is a signal input application function.
  • the trigger event EQ11 is a signal input event.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the processing unit 230 processes the received first sensing signal SN11 in response to the trigger event EQ11 of the trigger signal ST11 received by the input unit 270 to obtain the first measurement value VN11.
  • the trigger signal ST11 is provided by one of a function switch 470 and a signal generator 472.
  • the server 280 includes the memory unit 25Y1.
  • the input unit 270 is coupled to at least one of the function switch 470 and the signal generator 472.
  • the input unit 270 is the trigger application unit 281, and responds to the trigger signal ST11 to provide the operation request signal SX11 to the processing unit 230, thereby enabling the processing unit 230 to receive the operation request Signal SX11.
  • the measurement application function FC11 is a user input application function.
  • the trigger event EQ11 is a user input event.
  • the control device 210 further includes an electrical application target WJ11 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the user input operation JU11 is used to select the electrical application target WJ11.
  • the processing unit 230 processes the received first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11.
  • the control device 210 is used by a user 295.
  • the user input operation JU11 is executed by the user 295.
  • the electrical application target WJ11 is an electrical application unit.
  • the electrical application target WJ11 is one of a sensing target and a display target. Under the condition that the electrical application target WJ11 is the sensing target, the input unit 270 includes the electrical application target WJ11. Under the condition that the electrical application target WJ11 is the display target, the output unit 240 includes the electrical application target WJ11.
  • the input unit 270 is the trigger application unit 281, generates an operation request signal SZ11 in response to the user input operation JU11, provides the operation request signal SZ11 to the processing unit 230, and thereby causes the processing unit 230 receives the operation request signal SZ11.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the trigger event EQ11 in response to the operation request signal SZ11.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VN11 based on the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the sensing target is a button target.
  • the display target is an icon target.
  • the operation request signal SZ11 is the operation request signal SX11; or the operation request signal SX11 is equal to the operation request signal SZ11.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8020 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8020 includes the control device 210, the control target device 330 and the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297, and the Storage unit 250.
  • the operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280, the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 includes a physical parameter formation area AU11 coupled to the output unit 240, and is configured to form the variable physical parameter QU1A in the physical parameter formation area AU11.
  • the sensing unit 334 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU11.
  • the physical parameter formation area AU11 has the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the sensing unit 334 is arranged in the physical parameter formation area AU11.
  • the control device 210 is set in an application environment EX11, or has the application environment EX11.
  • one of the control target device 330 and the application environment EX11 has the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the physical parameter formation area AU11 is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area, and an environment area.
  • the control target device 330 includes an operating unit 397 and a functional unit 335 coupled to the operating unit 397.
  • the functional unit 335 includes the physical parameter formation area AU11.
  • the operating unit 397 receives the first control signal SC11, and generates a function signal SG11 in response to the first control signal SC11.
  • the function signal SG11 is a control signal.
  • the function unit 335 receives the function signal SG11, and responds to the function signal SG11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the function signal SG11 is one of an operation signal, a control signal, a pulse width modulation signal, a level signal, and a driving signal.
  • the functional unit 335 is a functional target.
  • the operating unit 297 communicates with the operating unit 397 in a wired or wireless manner; therefore, the operating unit 297 transmits the first control signal SC11 to the operating unit 397 in a wired or wireless manner .
  • the operating unit 397 receives the first control signal SC11 from the output unit 240 by wire or wirelessly.
  • the first control signal SC11 is one of an electrical signal SP11 and an optical signal SQ11.
  • the operation unit 397 receives the electric signal SP11 from the output unit 240.
  • the operation unit 397 receives the optical signal SQ11 for delivering an encoded image FY11 from the output unit 240.
  • the encoded image FY11 represents the control code CC1T, and is a barcode image.
  • the electrical signal SP11 is a radio signal.
  • the optical signal SQ11 is an infrared signal.
  • the functional unit 335 has the variable physical parameter QU1A and is controlled by the operating unit 397. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is provided by the control device 210, the operating unit 397 receives a physical parameter signal SB11 from the output unit 240. The functional unit 335 receives the physical parameter signal SB11 from the operating unit 397. The operating unit 397 causes the functional unit 335 to use the physical parameter signal SB11 to form the variable physical parameter QU1A that depends on the physical parameter signal SB11. For example, the output unit 240 transmits the physical parameter signal SB11 to the operation unit 397 in a wired or wireless manner.
  • the triggering event caused by the control target device 330 is a state change event.
  • the control device 210 further includes a state change detector 475 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the state change detector 475 is one of a limit detector and an edge detector.
  • the limit detector is a limit switch 485.
  • the state change detector 475 is configured to detect that a characteristic physical parameter related to a default characteristic physical parameter UL11 reaches ZL12.
  • the default characteristic physical parameter UL11 is a default limit position.
  • the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL12 is a limit position reaching.
  • the functional unit 335 includes a physical parameter application area AJ11.
  • the physical parameter application area AJ11 has a variable physical parameter QG1A.
  • the variable physical parameter QG1A is dependent on the variable physical parameter QU1A, and is characterized based on the default characteristic physical parameter UL11.
  • the physical parameter application area AJ11 is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area, and an environment area.
  • the default characteristic physical parameter UL11 is related to the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the operating unit 397 receives a control signal SC10 from the output unit 240.
  • the operating unit 397 executes a signal generation control GY10 in response to the received control signal SC10 to generate a function signal SG10 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A, and provides the function signal SG10 to the function Unit 335.
  • the function unit 335 receives the function signal SG10 from the operation unit 397, and executes the specific function operation ZH11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A in response to the received function signal SG10.
  • the specific function operation ZH11 is used to control the variable physical parameter QG1A, and cause the trigger event EQ11 to occur by changing the variable physical parameter QG1A.
  • the variable physical parameter QG1A is configured to be in a variable physical state XA1A.
  • the operation unit 397 is controlled by the control device 210 so that the function unit 335 executes the specific function operation ZH11.
  • the specific function operation ZH11 is a spatial movement operation.
  • the state change detector 475 generates a trigger signal SX1A in response to the specific function operation ZH11.
  • the specific functional operation ZH11 causes the variable physical parameter QG1A to reach the default characteristic physical parameter UL11 to form the characteristic physical parameter.
  • the parameter reaches ZL12, and the variable physical state XA1A is changed from a non-characteristic physical parameter reaching state XA11 to an actual characteristic physical parameter reaching state XA12 by forming the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL12.
  • the state change detector 475 generates the trigger signal SX1A in response to the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL12. For example, the actual characteristic physical parameter reaching state XA12 is characterized based on the default characteristic physical parameter UL11.
  • the state change detector 475 generates the trigger signal SX1A in response to a state change event in which the variable physical parameter QG1A is changed from the non-characteristic physical parameter reaching state XA11 to the actual characteristic physical parameter reaching state XA12 .
  • the operating unit 297 transmits the control signal SC10 to the receiving unit 337 in response to a trigger event EQ10.
  • the state change detector 475 is a trigger application unit.
  • the trigger event EQ11 is the state change event in which the variable physical parameter QG1A enters the actual characteristic physical parameter arrival state XA12.
  • the input unit 270 is coupled to the state change detector 475.
  • One of the input unit 270 and the processing unit 230 receives the trigger signal SX1A.
  • the processing unit 230 generates the first control signal SC11 in response to the received trigger signal SX1A.
  • the state change detector 475 is the limit switch 485
  • the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL12 is equal to a variable space position and the variable physical parameter QG1A reaches a value equal to a default limit position.
  • a limit position of the default characteristic physical parameter UL11 is reached.
  • the operation request signal SX11 is equal to the trigger signal SX1A.
  • the input unit 270 includes a touch screen 2701 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the touch screen 2701 includes the electrical application target WJ11.
  • the touch screen 2701 is the trigger application unit 281, receives the user input operation JU11, generates the operation request signal SX11 in response to the user input operation JU11 using the electrical application target WJ11, and provides the The operation request signal SX11 is sent to the processing unit 230.
  • the electrical application target WJ11 receives the user input operation JU11.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the received trigger signal SX1A.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L Under the condition of the application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 obtains the control data code CK1T based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L, and causes the output unit to generate the control data code CK1T based on the obtained control data code CK1T 240 generates the first control signal SC11 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the functional unit 335 forms the variable physical parameter QG1A in the physical parameter application area AJ11 by executing the specific functional operation ZH11 caused based on the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the state change detector 475 detects that the characteristic physical parameter reaches ZL12.
  • variable physical parameter QU1A is a first variable electrical parameter, a first variable mechanical parameter, a first variable optical parameter, a first variable temperature, a first variable Variable voltage, a first variable current, a first variable electric power, a first variable resistor, a first variable capacitor, a first variable inductance, a first variable frequency, a first Clock time, a first variable time length, a first variable brightness, a first variable light intensity, a first variable volume, a first variable data flow, a first variable amplitude, a first A variable space position, a first variable displacement, a first variable sequence position, a first variable angle, a first variable space length, a first variable distance, a first variable translation speed , One of a first variable angular velocity, a first variable acceleration, a first variable force, a first variable pressure, and a first variable mechanical power.
  • the operating unit 397 is configured to rely on the control signal SC11 to execute a physical parameter control function FA11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the control target device 330 is one of a plurality of application devices.
  • the physical parameter control function FA11 is one of a plurality of specific control functions, and the plurality of specific control functions include a light control function, a force control function, an electric control function, a magnetic control function, and any combination thereof.
  • the multiple application devices include a functional device, a relay, a control switch device, an electric motor, a lighting device, a door, a vending machine, an energy converter, a load device, a timing device, a toy, a Electrical appliances, a printing device, a display device, a mobile device, a speaker, and any combination thereof.
  • the functional unit 335 is one of multiple application targets and is configured to perform a specific application function.
  • the specific application function is one of multiple physical parameter application functions, and the multiple physical parameter application functions include a light use function, a force use function, an electricity use function, a magnetic use function, and any combination thereof.
  • the multiple application targets include an electronic component, an actuator, a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a relay, a control switch, a transistor, a motor, a lighting unit, an energy conversion unit, and a load Unit, time unit, a printing unit, a display target, a speaker, and any combination thereof.
  • the functional unit 335 is a physically implementable functional unit.
  • variable physical parameter QU1A and the variable physical parameter QG1A belong to a physical parameter type TU11 and a physical parameter type TU1G, respectively.
  • the physical parameter type TU11 is the same as or different from the physical parameter type TU1G.
  • the default characteristic physical parameter UL11 belongs to the physical parameter type TU1G.
  • the functional unit 335 includes the physical parameter formation area AU11 having the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the physical parameter application area AJ11 is coupled to the physical parameter forming area AU11.
  • the specific function operation ZH11 is used to drive the physical parameter application area AJ11 to form the characteristic physical parameter to ZL12.
  • the physical parameter type TU11 is different from a time type.
  • the variable physical parameter QG1A is a variable electrical parameter, a variable mechanical parameter, a variable optical parameter, a variable temperature, a variable voltage, a variable current, a variable electric power, a variable Variable resistance, one variable capacitor, one variable inductance, one variable frequency, one clock time, one variable time length, one variable brightness, one variable light intensity, one variable volume, one variable amount of data , A variable amplitude, a variable spatial position, a variable displacement, a variable sequence position, a variable angle, a variable length, a variable space length, a variable distance, a variable translation speed, One of a variable angular velocity, a variable acceleration, a variable force, a variable pressure, and a variable mechanical power.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is the same as or different from the variable physical parameter QG1A.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8021 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8022 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8023 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1. 12, 13 and 14, each of the implementation structure 8021, the implementation structure 8022, and the implementation structure 8023 includes the control device 210, the control target device 330, and the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297, and the Storage unit 250.
  • the operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280, the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11. For example, under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11. After the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 to cause the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 within the operation time TD11, the sensing unit 334 senses the The physical parameter QU1A is changed to generate the second sensing signal SN12.
  • the sensing unit 334 is a time sensing unit, an electrical parameter sensing unit, a mechanical parameter sensing unit, an optical parameter sensing unit, a temperature sensing unit, a humidity sensing unit, One of a motion sensing unit and a magnetic parameter sensing unit.
  • the sensing unit 334 includes a sensing component 3341 coupled to the processing unit 230, and uses the sensing component 3341 to generate the first sensing signal SN11 and the second sensing signal SN12.
  • the sensing component 3341 belongs to a sensor type 7341 and is one of the first plurality of application sensors.
  • the first plurality of application sensors includes a first voltage sensor, a first current sensor, a first resistance sensor, a first capacitance sensor, a first inductance sensor, a first accelerometer, and a first gyroscope , A first pressure transducer, a first strain gauge, a first timer, a first light detector, a first temperature sensor and a first humidity sensor.
  • the sensing component 3341 generates a sensing signal component SN111.
  • the first sensing signal SN11 includes the sensing signal component SN111.
  • the sensing unit 334 further includes a sensing component 3342 coupled to the processing unit 230, and uses the sensing component 3342 to generate the first sensing signal SN11 and the second sensing signal SN12.
  • the sensing component 3342 belongs to a sensor type 7342 and is one of the second plurality of application sensors.
  • the sensor type 7342 is different from or independent of the sensor type 7341.
  • the second plurality of application sensors includes a second voltage sensor, a second current sensor, a second resistance sensor, a second capacitance sensor, a second inductance sensor, a second accelerometer, and a second gyroscope , A second pressure transducer, a second strain gauge, a second timer, a second light detector, a second temperature sensor and a second humidity sensor.
  • the sensing component 3342 generates a sensing signal component SN112.
  • the first sensing signal SN11 further includes the sensing signal component SN112.
  • the sensing unit 334 belongs to a sensor type 734.
  • the sensor type 734 is related to the sensor type 7341 and the sensor type 7342.
  • the sensing unit 334, the sensing component 3341, and the sensing component 3342 are an electric power sensing unit, a voltage sensor, and a current sensor, respectively.
  • the sensing unit 334, the sensing component 3341, and the sensing component 3342 are an inertial measurement unit, an accelerometer, and a gyroscope, respectively.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A depends on a variable physical parameter JA1A and a variable physical parameter JB1A different from the variable physical parameter JA1A.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A, the variable physical parameter JA1A, and the variable physical parameter JB1A are respectively a variable electric power, a variable voltage, and a variable current, and belong to a first physical parameter.
  • the second physical parameter type and the third physical parameter type are different or independent.
  • the first physical parameter type depends on the second physical parameter type and the third physical parameter type.
  • the sensing component 3341 senses the variable physical parameter JA1A to generate the sensing signal component SN111.
  • the sensing component 3342 senses the variable physical parameter JB1A to generate the sensing signal component SN112.
  • the processing unit 230 receives the sensing signal component SN111 and the sensing signal component SN112. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 responds to the sensing signal component SN111 and the sensing signal component SN112 to obtain the first measurement value VN11. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains a measurement value VN111 in response to the sensing signal component SN111, obtains a measurement value VN112 in response to the sensing signal component SN112, and uses the measurement value VN111 and the A scientific calculation MY11 of the measured value VN112 is used to obtain the first measured value VN11. The scientific calculation MY11 is predetermined based on the first physical parameter type, the second physical parameter type, and the third physical parameter type.
  • Each physical parameter of the variable physical parameter JA1A and the variable physical parameter JB1A is a variable electrical parameter, a variable mechanical parameter, a variable optical parameter, a variable temperature, a variable voltage, One variable current, one variable electric power, one variable resistor, one variable capacitor, one variable inductance, one variable frequency, one clock time, one variable time length, one variable brightness, one variable Light intensity, a variable volume, a variable amount of data, a variable amplitude, a variable space position, a variable displacement, a variable sequence position, a variable angle, a variable space length, a variable One of distance, a variable translation speed, a variable angular velocity, a variable acceleration, a variable force, a variable pressure, and a variable mechanical power.
  • the sensing unit 334 is configured to comply with the sensor specification FU11.
  • the sensing unit 334 generates the first sensing signal SN11 by executing the sensing signal generation HF11 dependent on the sensor sensitivity YW11.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first Sensing signal SN11.
  • the sensing unit 334 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU11, or is located in the physical parameter formation area AU11.
  • the processing unit 230 receives the first sensing signal SN11, and obtains the first measurement value VN11 in the designated measurement value format HH11 by processing the received first sensing signal SN11.
  • the processing unit 230 compares the first measurement value VN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L to perform a check for checking the relationship between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L. According to the check operation BV11 of the first mathematical relationship KV11, the first logical decision PB11 is made based on the check operation BV11. In some embodiments, the processing unit 230 processes the received first sensing signal SN11 to obtain a measurement value sequence JN11 including the first measurement value VN11. The processing unit 230 performs a mathematical procedure for checking the measurement value sequence JN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L by comparing the measurement value sequence JN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L. A check operation BV15 for the relationship KV15. The processing unit 230 makes the first logical decision PB11 based on the check operation BV15. For example, the inspection operation BV15 includes the inspection operation BV11.
  • the processing unit 230 under the condition that the processing unit 230 recognizes that the first measurement value VN11 is an allowable value VG11 within the measurement value application range RN1L based on the first data comparison CD11, the processing unit 230 makes the first logical decision PB11 to become affirmative.
  • the processing unit 230 recognizes that the first mathematical relationship KV11 is a numerical intersection relationship KW11, the processing unit 230 makes the first logical decision PB11 to become affirmative.
  • the processing unit 230 performs a verification operation ZU11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A within the specified time TG12 after the operating time TD11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET into which the variable physical parameter QU1A enters based on the verification operation ZU11, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to store the determined The measurement value target range code EM1T is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the verification operation ZU11 responds to the second sensing signal SN12 within the specified time TG12 after the operating time TD11 to obtain the second measurement value VN12 in the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the verification operation ZU11 is based on one of the accessed control data code CK1T and the determined measurement value application range code EM1L
  • the measurement value target range code EM1T is determined to determine the measurement value target range RN1T.
  • the verification operation ZU11 obtains the target range limit value pair DN1T based on the determined measurement value target range code EM1T, and is based on the second measurement value VN12 and the obtained target
  • the third data between the range limit value and DN1T is compared with CD22 to check the third mathematical relationship KV22 between the second measured value VN12 and the determined target range of measured value RN1T to make the
  • the third logical decision PB22 is whether the second measurement value VN12 is within the determined target range RN1T of the measurement value.
  • the verification operation ZU11 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, or determines all the variable physical parameters QU1A enters.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, or determines all the variable physical parameters QU1A enters.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located based on the verification operation ZU11 Under the condition of the target range RD1ET, the processing unit 230 is based on the difference between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 and the determined measurement value target range code EM1T.
  • a code difference DF11 uses the storage unit 250 to assign the determined measurement value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter target range RD1ET based on the verification operation ZU11 within the specified time TG12.
  • the processing unit 230 performs a data comparison CE1T between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 and the determined measurement value target range code EM1T.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 and the determined measurement value target range code EM1T based on the data comparison CE1T.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to assign the determined measurement value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the first code difference DF11 based on the data comparison CE1T, the processing unit 230 executes the data storage control operation GU11, and the data storage control operation GU11 is used to cause the representative determined
  • the physical parameter target range code UN1T of the physical parameter target range RD1ET is recorded by the storage unit 250.
  • the physical parameter target range code UN1T is equal to the determined measured value target range code EM1T.
  • the data storage control operation GU11 uses the storage unit 250 to assign the determined measurement value target range code EM1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the output unit 240 displays the first status indication LB11.
  • the first state indication LB11 is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured in the first specific state XJ11 within the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4.
  • the output unit 240 is configured to obtain the specific measurement value range code EM14, and based on the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14 to cause the output unit 240 to display the The first state indicates LB11.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the first code difference DF11 based on the data comparison CE1T
  • the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to convert the first code difference DF11 based on the determined measurement value target range code EM1T
  • the status indication LB11 changes to the second status indication LB12.
  • the second state indication LB12 is used to indicate that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the second specific state XJ12 within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • both the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the physical parameter application range RD1EL are included in the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET is different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3.
  • the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL, and is the same as or different from the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL is a physical parameter candidate range.
  • the second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 is different from the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, is the same or different from the physical parameter target range RD1ET, and is the same or different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on the corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL corresponding to the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the rated physical parameter range RD1E is equal to a range combination of the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL.
  • the corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL includes the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the corresponding physical parameter range RY1EL is represented by a corresponding measurement value range RX1L.
  • the rated measurement value range RD1N is equal to a range combination of the measurement value application range RN1L and the corresponding measurement value range RX1L.
  • the corresponding measurement value range RX1L includes the measurement value target range RN1T representing the physical parameter target range RD1ET, and is preset based on the measurement value application range RN1L and the rated measurement value range RD1N.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET is configured to correspond to a corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET.
  • the rated physical parameter range RD1E is equal to a range combination of the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET, and includes the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the measurement value target range RN1T is configured to correspond to a corresponding measurement value range RX1T.
  • the rated measurement value range RD1N is equal to a range combination of the measurement value target range RN1T and the corresponding measurement value range RX1T.
  • the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET is represented by the corresponding measurement value range RX1T.
  • the corresponding measurement value range RX1L and the corresponding measurement value range RX1T are preset based on one of the sensor measurement range representation GW1R and the sensor specification FU11 in the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • Both the measurement value target range RN1T and the measurement value application range RN1L are included in the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12,...
  • the measurement value target range RN1T is different from the measurement value application range RN1L.
  • the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is represented by the measurement value candidate range RN12.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12 is different from the measurement value application range RN1L, and is the same as or different from the measurement value target range RN1T.
  • the rated measurement value range RD1N includes the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value candidate range RN12.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12 is preset based on the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the rated measurement value range RD1N.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L is a measurement value candidate range.
  • the rated measurement value range RD1N is based on the rated physical parameter range representing GC1E, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, and the first data encoding operation ZX11 for converting the rated physical parameter range representing GC1E to use the designated
  • the measured value format HH11 is preset.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are separate or adjacent. Under the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are separated, the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value candidate range RN12 are separated. Under the condition that the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 are adjacent, the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value candidate range RN12 are adjacent.
  • the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,... include the physical parameter candidate ranges RD1E2, which are represented by the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12,..., and are referenced by multiple physical parameters, respectively Represented by the range code.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12 is represented by the measurement value candidate range code EM12 and has the candidate range limit value pair DN1B, whereby the measurement value candidate range code EM12 is configured to indicate the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.
  • the candidate range limit value pair DN1B includes a candidate range limit value DN13 of the measurement value candidate range RN12 and a candidate range limit value DN14 relative to the candidate range limit value DN13.
  • the measurement value candidate range code EM12 and the candidate range limit value pair DN1B are both preset.
  • the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... include the preset measurement value candidate range codes EM12.
  • the multiple physical parameter reference range codes are configured to be respectively equal to the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12,...
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 is used to represent the rated physical parameter range RD1E and the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the rated measurement value range RD1N, the rated range limit value pair DD1A, the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12,..., and the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12,... are all based on The measurement application function specification GCL1 is defaulted.
  • the measurement application function FC11 is selected from a plurality of different triggering functions.
  • the storage unit 250 stores the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the processing unit 230 presets the rated range limit value pair DD1A, the application range limit value pair DN1L, the target range limit value pair DN1T, and the candidate range limit value according to the measurement application function specification GCL1. To DN1B,....
  • the first sensing signal SN11 includes sensing data. For example, the sensing data belongs to the binary data type.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VN11 in the designated measurement value format HH11 based on the sensing data.
  • the operating unit 297 is configured to rely on the trigger event EQ11 to execute the measurement application function FC11.
  • the processing unit 230 determines whether the first measurement value VN11 is within the measurement value application range RN1L based on the check operation BV11 for the measurement application function FC11 to make the first logical decision PB11 . Under the condition that the first logical decision PB11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located, and executes a method for checking the determined physical parameter The first check operation ZY11 of the first range relationship KC1A between the application range RD1EL and the preset physical parameter range RD1EF.
  • the processing unit 230 determines whether the determined physical parameter application range RD1EL is the same as the first physical parameter range RD1EF based on the first check operation ZY11 for the measurement application function FC11. A specific decision is PD11. Under the condition that the first specific decision PD11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 makes the reasonable decision PW11 to be affirmative.
  • the processing unit 230 Under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is negative, the processing unit 230 directly reaches the first operation time TD11 independent of the first trigger signal WX11. Under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is affirmative, one of the control device 210 and the operating unit 297 responds to the first specific application operation ZA11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the The first trigger signal WX11. Under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 responds to the first trigger signal WX11 to reach the first operation time TD11 dependent on the first trigger signal WX11. The processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 based on the obtained control data code CK1T within the first operation time TD11 to cause the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11.
  • the input unit 270 receives the user input operation BQ11 , And respond to the user input operation BQ11 to provide an input data DH11 to the processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 performs a data encoding operation EA11 on the input data DH11 to determine the specific input code UW11.
  • the processing unit 230 performs a check operation ZP11 for the measurement application function FC11 in response to determining the specific input code UW11 to determine whether the determined specific input code UW11 is equal to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A. For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the specific input code UW11, the processing unit 230 reads the variable physical value equal to the measurement value target range code EM1T by using the storage unit 250 Parameter range code UN1A, and perform the checking operation ZP11 for checking an arithmetic relationship KP11 between the determined specific input code UW11 and the read measured value target range code EM1T.
  • the check operation ZP11 is configured to compare the determined specific input code UW11 with the read measurement value target range code EM1T by executing a data comparison CE11 for the measurement application function FC11 to determine Whether the determined specific input code UW11 and the read measured value target range code EM1T are different.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the determined specific input code UW11 by performing the data comparison CE11 and the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the determined target range code EM1T of the measured value Under the condition of the second code difference DX11, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to perform a signal generation operation BS15 for the measurement application function FC11 to generate a control signal SC15.
  • the output unit 240 transmits the control signal SC15 to the operation unit 397.
  • the operating unit 397 generates a function signal SG15 in response to the control signal SC15.
  • the function unit 335 receives the function signal SG15, and responds to the function signal SG15 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET from the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the function signal SG15 is one of a pulse width modulation signal, a level signal and a driving signal.
  • the function unit 335 responds to the function signal SG15 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the second specific physical parameter included in the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET Range RD1E5.
  • the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... include a specific measurement value range code EM15 that is different from the measurement value target range code EM1T.
  • the specific measurement value range code EM15 is configured to indicate the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the second code difference DX11 by performing the data comparison CE11, and responds to determining the second code difference DX11 causes the output unit 240 to generate the control signal SC15.
  • the control target device 330 responds to the control signal SC15 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the second specific physical parameter range included in the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET RD1E5.
  • the processing unit 230 performs a verification operation related to the variable physical parameter QU1A within a specified time.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 into which the variable physical parameter QU1A enters based on the verification operation, the processing unit 230 will be equal to the specific measurement value range code EM15
  • the determined specific input code UW11 is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 is equal to one of the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8024 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8025 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • each of the implementation structure 8024 and the implementation structure 8025 includes the control device 210, the control target device 330, and the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297, and the Storage unit 250.
  • the operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280, the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to use the storage unit 250 to access the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the specific measurement value range code EM14 to obtain the Specific measurement value range code EM14.
  • the first data determination operation AA11 determines the measurement value application range code EM1L by executing a scientific calculation ME11 using the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14.
  • the obtained specific measurement value range code EM14 is the same or different from the determined measurement value application range code EM1L.
  • the measurement application function FC11 is related to the memory unit 25Y1. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 is applied to the measurement application function FC11, the processing unit 230 is coupled to the memory unit 25Y1.
  • the storage unit 250 includes the memory unit 25Y1.
  • the processing unit 230 recognizes that the first mathematical relationship KV11 is a numerical value intersection relationship based on the first data comparison CD11 between the first measured value VN11 and the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L Under the condition of, the processing unit 230 makes the first logical decision PB11 to become affirmative.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the condition of a physical parameter of the variable physical parameter QU1A currently within the physical parameter application range RD1EL, and thereby identifies the A physical parameter relationship KD1L between the variable physical parameter QU1A and the physical parameter application range RD1EL is a physical parameter intersection relationship of the variable physical parameter QU1A currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the processing unit 230 checks the physical parameter relationship KD1L by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11.
  • the application range limit value pair DN1L belongs to a measurement range limit data code type TN11.
  • the measurement range limit data code type TN11 is identified by a measurement range limit data code type identifier HN11.
  • the control data code CK1T belongs to a control data code type TK11.
  • the control data code type TK11 is identified by a control data code type identifier HK11.
  • the measurement range limit data code type identifier HN11 and the control data code type identifier HK11 are both preset.
  • the rated measurement value range RD1N is configured to include the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12,...
  • the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,... are represented by the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12,..., respectively.
  • the first memory location PN1L is identified based on the first memory address FN1L, or is identified by the first memory address FN1L.
  • the second memory location PX1L is identified based on the second memory address FX1L, or is identified by the second memory address FX1L.
  • the first memory address FN1L is based on the default control target device identifier HA1T, the preset measurement value application range code EM1L, and the preset measurement range limit data code type identifier HN11. Preset.
  • the second memory address FX1L is preset based on the default control target device identifier HA1T, the preset measurement value application range code EM1L, and the default control data code type identifier HK11.
  • the control data code CK1T stored in the second memory location PX1L includes the control code CC1T and the measurement time length value CL1T.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the default control target device identifier HA1T and the preset measurement range limit data code type identifier HN11.
  • the first data obtaining operation AD11 obtains the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, the determined measurement value application range code EM1L, and the obtained measurement range limit data code type identifier HN11 based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T.
  • the first memory address FN1L, and based on the obtained first memory address FN1L, the memory unit 25Y1 is used to access the application range limit value pair DN1L stored in the first memory location PN1L to obtain The limit value of the application range is DN1L.
  • the total number of reference ranges NT11 is preset.
  • the storage unit 250 stores the total reference range number NT11 and the rated range limit value pair DD1A.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to perform a scientific calculation to obtain the preset total reference range number NT11 and the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A, or in response to the trigger event EQ11 to obtain The storage unit 250 obtains the total reference range number NT11 and the rated range limit value pair DD1A.
  • the operation reference data XU11 further includes the total number of reference ranges NT11.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the preset number of total reference ranges NT11 and the preset number of reference ranges based on the operation reference data XU11.
  • the limits of the rated range are for DD1A.
  • the second data determination operation AA12 is performed by using the first measurement value VN11 obtained and the total reference range number obtained NT11 and the obtained first scientific calculation MR11 of the rated range limit value for DD1A to select the measurement value application range code EM1L from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ... to determine The measurement value application range code EM1L.
  • the first scientific calculation MR11 is based on the preset total reference range number NT11, the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A, and the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12,... It is pre-built.
  • the second data acquisition operation AD12 is performed by using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L, the obtained rated range limit value pair DD1A, and the obtained number of the total reference range NT11.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the default control data code type identifier HK11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the current physical parameter application range RD1EL of the variable physical parameter QU1A, the processing unit 230 is based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T and the determined all The measurement value application range code EM1L and the obtained control data code type identifier HK11 are used to obtain the second memory address FX1L, and the memory unit 25Y1 is used to access the second memory address FX1L based on the obtained second memory address FX1L.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes the physical parameter representation GC1T1, and the physical parameter representation GC1T1 is used to represent the designated physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the accessed control data code CK1T includes the control code CC1T and the measurement time length value CL1T.
  • the control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC1T1 and the third data encoding operation ZX21 for converting the physical parameter representation GC1T1.
  • the signal generation control GS11 plays a role of instructing the output terminal 240P, and is used to cause the processing unit 230 to provide the control signal SH11 to the output unit 240.
  • the control signal SH11 plays a role of instructing the output terminal 240P.
  • the output unit 240 obtains the control code CC1T from the processing unit 230 in response to one of the signal generation control GS11 and the control signal SH11, and executes the use of the output terminal based on the control signal SH11
  • the first signal generation of 240P operates BS11 to generate the first control signal SC11.
  • the first control signal SC11 conveys the control code CC1T, and is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the processing unit 230 arrives at the specific time TJ1T based on the measurement time length value CL1T, and causes all the results within the specific time TJ1T.
  • the output unit 240 generates the third control signal SC22 that is different from the first control signal SC11.
  • the third control signal SC22 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter a physical parameter candidate range included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,... RD2E2.
  • the physical parameter candidate range RD2E2 is one of the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2, and is different from the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the physical parameter candidate range RD2E2 is represented by a physical parameter candidate range code UN22.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the physical parameter candidate range code UN22, and within the specific time TJ1T based on the obtained physical parameter candidate range code UN22 to cause the output unit 240 to generate the first Three control signal SC22.
  • the physical parameter candidate range RD2E2 is a specific physical parameter range.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8026 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8027 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8028 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • each of the implementation structure 8026, the implementation structure 8027, and the implementation structure 8028 includes the control device 210, the control target device 330, and the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297, and the Storage unit 250.
  • the operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280, the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330.
  • the electronic tag 350 includes the memory unit 25Y1.
  • the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,... include the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the physical parameter target range RD1ET, and a physical parameter candidate range RD1E7.
  • the multiple different measurement value reference ranges RN11, RN12, ... include the measurement value application range RN1L, the measurement value target range RN1T, and a measurement value candidate range RN17.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes a physical parameter candidate range representation GC17 for representing the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7.
  • the measurement value application range RN17 is preset in the designated measurement value format HH11 based on one of the sensor measurement range indication GW1R and the sensor specification FU11.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN17 is based on the physical parameter candidate range representing GC17, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representing GW11, and a data encoding operation for converting the physical parameter candidate range representing GC17 ZX17 uses the specified measurement value format HH11 by default, and is configured to represent the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7, and is determined by a measurement value included in the multiple different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ...
  • the candidate range code is represented by EM17.
  • the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is one of the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7.
  • the second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 is one of the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the physical parameter target range RD1ET, and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7.
  • the physical parameter candidate range RD2E2 is one of the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7.
  • the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 is one of the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7.
  • the memory unit 25Y1 further has a memory location PN12 and a memory location PX12 different from the memory location PN12, the candidate range limit value pair DN1B is stored in the memory location PN12, and is stored in the memory location PN12.
  • the memory location PX12 stores a control data code CK12.
  • the memory location PN12 and the memory location PX12 are both identified based on the preset measurement value candidate range code EM12.
  • the memory location PN12 is identified by a memory address FN12, or is identified based on the memory address FN12.
  • the memory location PX12 is identified by a memory address FX12, or is identified based on the memory address FX12.
  • the memory address FN12 and the memory address FX12 are preset based on the preset measurement value candidate range code EM12.
  • the candidate range limit value pair DN1B and the control data code CK12 belong to the measurement range limit data code type TN11 and the control data code type TK11, respectively.
  • the memory address FN12 is preset based on the default control target device identifier HA1T, the preset measurement value candidate range code EM12, and the preset measurement range limit data code type identifier HN11 .
  • the memory address FX12 is preset based on the default control target device identifier HA1T, the preset measurement value candidate range code EM12, and the default control data code type identifier HK11.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the memory address based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, the determined measurement value candidate range code EM12, and the obtained measurement range limit data code type identifier HN11 FN12, and use the memory unit 25Y1 to access the candidate range limit value pair DN1B stored in the memory location PN12 based on the obtained memory address FN12 to obtain the candidate range limit value pair DN1B.
  • the processing unit 230 performs a check for checking the first measurement value VN11 and the selected second data comparison CD21 between the first measurement value VN11 and the obtained candidate range limit value pair DN1B.
  • the processing unit 230 determines whether the first measurement value VN11 is within the selected measurement value candidate range RN12 based on the second logical decision PB21 based on the check operation BV21, and is in the first The second logical decision PB21 is to determine the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located. For example, the processing unit 230 determines a physical parameter situation of the variable physical parameter QU1A currently within the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 based on the check operation BV21, and thereby identifies the variable physical parameter.
  • a physical parameter relationship KD12 between the parameter QU1A and the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is a physical parameter intersection relationship of the variable physical parameter QU1A currently in the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.
  • the processing unit 230 checks the physical parameter relationship KD12 by checking the second mathematical relationship KV21.
  • the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 by making the second logical decision PB21, the The processing unit 230 obtains the memory address FX12 based on the obtained control target device identifier HA1T, the determined measured value candidate range code EM12, and the obtained control data code type identifier HK11, and based on The obtained memory address FX12 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the control data code CK12 stored in the memory location PX12.
  • the control data code CK12 includes a control code CC13.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes a physical parameter representation GC131, and the physical parameter representation GC131 is used to indicate a designated physical parameter QD13 included in the second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3.
  • the control code CC13 is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC131 and a data encoding operation ZX23 for converting the physical parameter representation GC131.
  • the output unit 240 causes the output unit 240 to perform the second signal generation operation BS21 for the measurement application function FC11 to generate all signals different from the first control signal SC11.
  • the second control signal SC12 conveys the control code CC13, and is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,... The second physical parameter candidate range in RD1E3.
  • the second control signal SC12 that transmits the control code CC13 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET may enter the second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 that is the same as the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the input unit 270 receives the user input operation BQ11 , And respond to the user input operation BQ11 to cause the processing unit 230 to determine the specific input code UW11.
  • the specific input code UW11 is selected from the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ..., and is equal to the specific input code included in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12, ...
  • the measurement range code is EM15.
  • the storage unit 250 of the processing unit stores a control data code CJ15 that is stored based on the specific measurement value range code EM15. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the specific input code UW11, the processing unit 230 performs the data comparison CE11 between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A and the determined specific input code UW11 . When the processing unit 230 determines, based on the data comparison CE11, the difference between the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the determined target range code EM1T of the measured value and the determined specific input code UW11 Under the condition of the second code difference DX11, the processing unit 230 accesses the control data code CJ15 based on the determined specific input code UW11. For example, the control data code CJ15 includes a control code CC15.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes a physical parameter representation GC151, and the physical parameter representation GC151 is used to indicate a designated physical parameter QD15 included in the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5.
  • the control code CC15 is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC151 and a data encoding operation ZX25 for converting the physical parameter representation GC151.
  • the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to perform the signal generation operation BS15 for the measurement application function FC11 based on the accessed control data code CJ15 to generate a signal that is different from the first control data code CJ15.
  • the control signal SC15 includes the control code CC15, and is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is related to a control code CC1L.
  • the control code CC1L is preset based on a designated physical parameter QD1L included in the physical parameter application range RD1EL. Under the condition that the control code CC15 is the same as the control code CC1L, the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 is the same as the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • one of the input unit 270 and the output unit 240 includes a user interface area AP11 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 relies on the user interface area AP11 to obtain an input data DG11 and an input data DG12.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the preset application range limit value pair DN1L based on the input data DG11, and obtains the default control based on the input data DG12 Data code CK1T.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the preset application range limit value pair DN1L by performing a data encoding operation ZX2A on the input data DG11, and performs a data encoding operation on the input data DG12 ZX2B to obtain the default control data code CK1T.
  • the input unit 270 receives a user input operation BU15 for operating the user interface area AP11, and responds to the user input operation BU15 to cause the processing unit 230 to obtain the input data from the input unit 270 DG11.
  • the input unit 270 receives a user input operation BU16 for operating the user interface area AP11, and responds to the user input operation BU16 to cause the processing unit 230 to obtain the input data from the input unit 270 DG12.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the default control target device identifier HA1T, the preset measurement value application range code EM1L, and the preset measurement
  • the range limit data code type identifier HN11 and the default control data code type identifier HK11 are based on the acquired control target device identifier HA1T, the acquired measurement value application range code EM1L and the acquired
  • the measurement range limit data code type identifier HN11 is used to obtain the first memory address FN1L, and the operation is caused based on the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L and the obtained first memory address FN1L
  • the unit 297 provides the first write request information WD1L of the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L and the obtained first memory address FN1L.
  • the first write request information WD1L is used to cause the memory unit 25Y1 to store the delivered application range limit value pair DN1L in the first memory location PN1L.
  • the processing unit 230 is based on the acquired control target device identifier HA1T, the acquired measurement value application range code EM1L, and the acquired control data code type identifier.
  • HK11 obtains the second memory address FX1L, and based on the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained second memory address FX1L, causes the operation unit 297 to provide and transmit the obtained control data code CK1T and the obtained second write request information WC1L of the second memory address FX1L.
  • the second write request information WC1L is used to cause the memory unit 25Y1 to store the transferred control data code CK1T in the second memory location PX1L.
  • one of the electronic tag 350, the storage unit 250, and the server 280 includes the memory unit 25Y1.
  • the processing unit 230 causes the reader 220 to provide the first write request information WD1L and the second write request information WC1L to all Mentioned electronic label 350.
  • the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to provide the first write request information WD1L and the second write request information WC1L to the server 280.
  • the processing unit 230 provides the first write request information WD1L and the second write request information WC1L to the storage unit 250.
  • the control device 210 is a computing device, a communication device, a user device, a mobile device, a remote control, an electronic device, a portable device, a desktop device, and a relatively fixed device. , One of a fixed device, a smart phone and any combination thereof.
  • the electronic tag 350 is one of a passive electronic tag, an active electronic tag, a semi-active electronic tag, a wireless electronic tag and a wired electronic tag.
  • the control device 210 transmits the first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330 through an actual link LK1A between the output unit 240 and the operation unit 397.
  • the actual link LK1A is one of a wired link and a wireless link LK11.
  • the first control signal SC11 is one of an electrical signal SP11 and an optical signal SQ11.
  • the output unit 240 includes an output component 450, a display component 460, and an output component 455.
  • the output component 450 is coupled to the processing unit 230, and is used to output the electrical signal SP11 under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the electrical signal SP11.
  • the output component 450 is a transmission component.
  • the display component 460 displays the first status indicator LB11.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the first code difference DF11 based on the data comparison CE1T, the processing unit 230 causes the display component 460 to display the first code difference DF11 based on the determined measurement value target range code EM1T
  • the status indication LB11 changes to the second status indication LB12.
  • the display component 460 is coupled to the processing unit 230 for displaying a piece of measurement information LY11 related to the first measurement value VN11, and for outputting under the condition that the control signal SC11 is the optical signal SQ11
  • the optical signal SQ11 of a coded image FY11 is delivered.
  • the output component 455 is coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to cause the output component 455 to transmit a physical parameter signal SB11 to the control target device 330.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is formed based on the physical parameter signal SB11.
  • the output component 455 is a transmission component.
  • the encoded image FY11 represents the control code CC1T.
  • the encoded image FY11 is a barcode image.
  • the electrical signal SP11 is a radio signal.
  • the optical signal SQ11 is an infrared signal.
  • the operating unit 297 is coupled to the server 280 through a network 410.
  • the input unit 270 includes an input component 440, an input component 442 and a receiving component 446.
  • the input component 440 is coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • one of the input component 440 and the display component 460 includes the user interface area AP11.
  • the input component 442 is coupled to the processing unit 230 and receives the user input operation BQ11.
  • the receiving component 446 is an input component and is coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the output component 450, the display component 460, the output component 455, the input component 440, the input component 442, the receiving component 446, and the The reader 220 is controlled by the processing unit 230.
  • the operating unit 297 is coupled to the network 410; and the network 410 is coupled to the server 280.
  • the input component 442 is the same as or different from the input component 440.
  • the input component 442 is the input component
  • the input component 442 receives the user input operation BQ11 and responds to the user input operation BQ11.
  • the user input operation BQ11 to provide the input data DH11 to the processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 performs the data encoding operation EA11 on the input data DH11 to determine the specific input code UW11.
  • the operating unit 397 generates an operation report RL11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A in response to the first control signal SC11, and transmits it to the receiving component 446 based on the operation report RL11 A control response signal SE11 of the operation report RL11 is sent.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the control response signal SE11 to execute a specific actual operation BJ11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the operation report RL11 from the control response signal SE11, and executes the specific actual operation BJ11 using the obtained operation report RL11 based on the obtained operation report RL11.
  • the display component 460 performs a display operation BD11.
  • the display operation BD11 displays the operation report RL11.
  • the operating unit 397 transmits the control response signal SE11 to the receiving component 446 through an actual link LK2A between the receiving component 446 and the operating unit 397.
  • the actual link LK2A is one of a wired link and a wireless link LK21.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8029 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8030 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • each of the implementation structure 8029 and the implementation structure 8030 includes the control device 210, the control target device 330, and the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297, and the Storage unit 250.
  • the operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280, the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 includes the operating unit 397 and the functional unit 335 coupled to the operating unit 397.
  • the functional unit 335 includes the physical parameter formation area AU11, and is controlled by the operating unit 397.
  • the physical parameter formation area AU11 has the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the operating unit 397 receives the first control signal SC11, the second control signal SC12, the third control signal SC22, and the control signal SC15, and responds to the first control signal SC11, the second control signal SC11, and the second control signal SC15. Any signal of the control signal SC12, the third control signal SC22, and the control signal SC15 uses the functional unit 335 to control the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the first control signal SC11 conveys the control code CC1T.
  • the operating unit 397 obtains the control code CC1T from the received first control signal SC11, and generates the function signal SG11 based on the obtained control code CC1T.
  • the function unit 335 receives the function signal SG11, and responds to the function signal SG11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the function signal SG11 is one of a control signal, a pulse width modulation signal, a level signal, and a driving signal.
  • the operation unit 297 includes a communication interface unit 246 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the communication interface unit 246 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and includes the receiving component 446 and the output component 450 (or a transmission component 450).
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the network 410 through the communication interface unit 246.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 through the communication interface unit 246 and the network 410.
  • the operating unit 397 includes a communication interface unit 386 coupled to the processing unit 331.
  • the processing unit 331 is coupled to the network 410 through the communication interface unit 386.
  • the communication interface unit 386 is controlled by the processing unit 331.
  • the processing unit 331 is coupled to the server 280 through the communication interface unit 386 and the network 410.
  • the communication interface unit 246 is wired or wirelessly linked to the communication interface unit 386 through the network 410.
  • the processing unit 230 enables the communication interface unit 246 (or the transmission component 450) to transmit the first control signal SC11, the second control signal SC12, and the communication interface unit 386 to the communication interface unit 386 via the network 410. Either the third control signal SC22 and the control signal SC15.
  • the communication interface unit 386 is wired or wirelessly linked to the operation unit 297 through the network 410, and receives the first control signal SC11, the second control signal SC12, and the Either the third control signal SC22 and the control signal SC15.
  • the communication interface unit 386 is one of a wired communication interface unit and a wireless communication interface unit.
  • the network 410 is one of a wired network and a wireless network.
  • the processing unit 331 causes the communication interface unit 386 to transmit the control response signal SE11 to the receiving component 446 via the network 410.
  • the processing unit 230 enables the communication interface unit 246 (or the transmission component 450) to transmit the first control signal SC11, the second control signal SC12, and the communication interface unit 386 to the communication interface unit 386 through the actual link LK1A. Any signal of the third control signal SC22 and the control signal SC15.
  • the processing unit 331 causes the communication interface unit 386 to transmit the control response signal SE11 to the receiving component 446 through the actual link LK2A.
  • the operating unit 297 further includes a timer 539 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the timer 539 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and is configured to comply with a timer specification FW11.
  • the default control data code CK1T includes the control code CC1T, the measurement time length value CL1T, and a control code CC22 different from the control code CC1T.
  • the variable time length LF1A is further characterized based on a reference time length LJ1T.
  • the measurement time length value CL1T represents the reference time length LJ1T, and is preset in a designated count value format HQ21 based on at least one of the reference time length LJ1T and the timer specification FW11.
  • the designated count value format HQ21 is characterized based on a designated number of bits UX21.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes a physical parameter representing GC221 and a time length representing GC1KJ.
  • the physical parameter representation GC221 is used to indicate a designated physical parameter QD22 included in the physical parameter candidate range RD2E2.
  • the time length representation GC1KJ is used to represent the reference time length LJ1T.
  • the control code CC22 is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC221 and a data encoding operation ZX2B for converting the physical parameter representation GC221.
  • the physical parameter candidate range RD2E2 is different from the physical parameter target range RD1ET, and is included in the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the measurement time length value CL1T is based on the time length representation GC1KJ, the timer specification FW11, and a data encoding operation ZX1KJ for converting the time length representation GC1KJ to the designated count value format HQ21. Preset.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by making the first logical decision PB11, the processing unit 230 is based on the determined
  • the measurement value application range code EM1L is used to obtain the control data code CK1T, and the signal for the measurement application function FC11 is executed based on the control code CC1T included in the obtained control data code CK1T
  • the control GS11 is generated to control the output unit 240.
  • the signal generation control GS11 provides the obtained control code CC1T to the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 uses the provided control code CC1T to generate the first control signal SC11 in response to the signal generation control GS11.
  • the timer 539 is used to measure the variable time length LF1A.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the signal generation control GS11 to check the value between the measurement time length value CL1T and the measurement time length value reference range GJ11 included in the obtained control data code CK1T
  • the relationship KJ11 is used to make the logical decision PE11 for controlling whether the counting operation BC1T of the specific time TJ1T is to be executed. Under the condition that the logical decision PE11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 causes the timer 539 to perform the counting operation BC1T based on the measured time length value CL1T.
  • the measurement time length value CL1T and the measurement time length value reference range GJ11 are both preset based on the timer specification FW11 in the designated count value format HQ21.
  • the measurement time length value reference range GJ11 used to make the logical decision PE11 has a time length range limit value pair LN1A, and represents the time length reference range HJ11.
  • the measurement time length value reference range GJ11 is preset in the designated count value format HQ21 based on at least one of the time length reference range HJ11 and the timer specification FW11.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes a time length reference range representation GC1HJ, and the time length reference range representation GC1HJ is used to represent the time length reference range HJ11.
  • the time length reference range HJ11 and the time length range limit value pair LN1A are based on the time length reference range representation GC1HJ, the timer specification FW11 and a data code used to convert the time length reference range representation GC1HJ Operate ZX1HJ to use the specified count value format HQ21 to be preset.
  • the storage unit 250 stores the time length range limit value pair LN1A.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the time length range limit value pair LN1A from the storage unit 250 in response to the signal generation control GS11, and compares the measurement included in the obtained control data code CK1T The time length value CL1T and the obtained time length range limit value pair LN1A are used to check the numerical relationship KJ11 to make the logical decision PE11.
  • the processing unit 230 under the condition that the processing unit 230 recognizes that the numerical relationship KJ11 is a numerical intersection relationship by checking the numerical relationship KJ11, the processing unit 230 makes the logical decision PE11 to become affirmative.
  • the time length range limit value is preset for LN1A, and includes a time length range limit value LN11 of the measurement time length value reference range GJ11 and a time length range relative to the time length range limit value LN11
  • the limit value is LN12.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the reference time length LJ1T by comparing the measured time length value CL1T included in the obtained control data code CK1T with the obtained time length range limit value pair LN1A. Under the condition that the time length reference range HJ11 included in the time length, the processing unit 230 makes the logical decision PE11 to be affirmative.
  • the processing unit 230 under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be within the physical parameter target range RD1ET due to the trigger event EQ11, the processing unit 230 performs the calculation based on the counting operation BC1T. An application time length LT1T with an end time TZ1T is experienced to reach the specific time TJ1T.
  • the processing unit 230 executes a signal generation control GS22 for the measurement application function FC11 based on the control code CC22 included in the obtained control data code CK1T within the specific time TJ1T to control The output unit 240.
  • the signal generation control GS22 provides the obtained control code CC22 to the output unit 240.
  • the first control signal SC11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have the application time length LT1T matching the reference time length LJ1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the output unit 240 obtains the control code CC22 from the processing unit 230 in response to the signal generation control GS22, and performs a signal generation for the measurement application function FC11 based on the obtained control code CC22
  • the BS22 is operated to generate the third control signal SC22 that is different from the first control signal SC11.
  • the third control signal SC22 is used to control the functional unit 335 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the physical parameter candidate range RD2E2.
  • the specific time TJ1T is adjacent to the end time TZ1T.
  • the timer 539 when the timer 539 reaches the end time TZ1T by executing the counting operation BC1T, the timer 539 transmits an interrupt request signal UH1T to the processing unit 230 to cause the processing unit 230 to arrive The specific time TJ1T.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the control code CC22 to execute the signal generation control GS22 in response to the interrupt request signal UH1T.
  • the physical parameter candidate range RD2E2 is the same as the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the rated physical parameter range RD1E of the variable physical parameter QU1A includes the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,...
  • the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,... include the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the physical parameter target range RD1ET, and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is in one of a plurality of reference states based on the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,....
  • the multiple reference states are different and include a first reference state, a second reference state, and a third reference state, whereby the variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized by a variable current state.
  • the variable current state is one of the multiple reference states.
  • the first reference state and the second reference state are complementary.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is in the first reference state.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is in the second reference state.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is in the third reference state.
  • the control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to change from a current state to the second reference state, or responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the
  • the changed physical parameter QU1A is changed from the first specific physical parameter QU13 to the second specific physical parameter QU14.
  • the current state is the first reference state.
  • the first specific physical parameter QU13 is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL
  • the second specific physical parameter QU14 is within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET is represented by the corresponding measured value range RX1T, and includes the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E7.
  • the corresponding measurement value range RX1T includes the measurement value application range RN1L and the measurement value candidate range RN17. Any one of the second control signal SC12, the third control signal SC22, and the control signal SC15 is used to control the functional unit 335 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET To enter the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET.
  • the multiple reference states respectively cause the functional unit 335 to be in multiple functional states.
  • the multiple functional states are different and include a first functional state, a second functional state, and a third functional state.
  • the first functional state and the second functional state are complementary.
  • the functional unit 335 Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the functional unit 335 is in the first functional state.
  • the functional unit 335 Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is within the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the functional unit 335 is in the second functional state.
  • the functional unit 335 is in the third functional state.
  • the measurement value application range code EM1L is a measurement value reference range number.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L is arranged in the rated measurement value range RD1N based on the measurement value application range code EM1L.
  • the measurement value target range code EM1T is a measurement value reference range number.
  • the measurement value target range RN1T is arranged in the rated measurement value range RD1N based on the measurement value target range code EM1T.
  • the measurement value candidate range code EM12 is a measurement value reference range number.
  • the measurement value candidate range RN12 is arranged in the rated measurement value range RD1N based on the measurement value candidate range code EM12.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the physical parameter application range RD1EL is the relatively high physical parameter range and the physical parameter range. The other one of the relatively low physical parameter ranges.
  • the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high voltage range and a relatively low voltage range, respectively.
  • the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high current range and a relatively low current range, respectively.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable resistance
  • the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high resistance range and a relatively low resistance range, respectively.
  • the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high brightness range and a relatively low brightness range, respectively.
  • the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are respectively a relatively high light intensity range and a relatively low light intensity range .
  • the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high volume range and a relatively low volume range, respectively.
  • the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range are a relatively high angular velocity range and a relatively low angular velocity range, respectively.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the physical parameter target range RD1ET is the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is the relatively high physical parameter range and the relatively low physical parameter range.
  • the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the second physical parameter candidate range RD1E3 is the relatively high physical parameter range and the corresponding physical parameter range.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the first specific physical parameter range RD1E4 is the relatively high physical parameter range and the relative Another of the low physical parameter ranges.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET is one of a relatively high physical parameter range and a relatively low physical parameter range; and the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 is the relatively high physical parameter range and the relative Another of the low physical parameter ranges.
  • the operating unit 297 is configured to execute the measurement application function FC11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A depending on the trigger event EQ11.
  • the control target device 330 is one of a plurality of application devices.
  • the measurement application function FC11 is one of a plurality of specific actual functions, and the plurality of specific actual functions include an optical application function, a force application function, an electrical application function, a magnetic application function, and any combination thereof.
  • the multiple application devices include a relay, a control switch device, a motor, a lighting device, a door, a vending machine, an energy converter, a load device, a fixed time device, a toy, an electrical appliance, and a printing device.
  • the functional unit 335 is one of multiple application targets and is configured to perform a specific application function.
  • the specific application function is one of multiple physical parameter application functions, and the multiple physical parameter application functions include a light use function, a force use function, an electricity use function, a magnetic use function, and any combination thereof.
  • the multiple application targets include an electronic component, an actuator, a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a relay, a control switch, a transistor, a motor, a lighting unit, an energy conversion unit, and a load Unit, time unit, a printing unit, a display target, a speaker, and any combination thereof.
  • the functional unit 335 under the condition that the control target device 330 is a relay, is a control switch. Under the condition that the functional unit 335 is the control switch, the control switch has a variable switch state and is in one of an on state and an off state based on the variable physical parameter QU1A .
  • the variable switch state is equal to one of the on state and the off state, and the on state and the off state are complementary.
  • the on state is one of the first functional state and the second functional state
  • the off state is the other of the first functional state and the second functional state.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by making the first logical decision PB11, the processing unit 230 recognizes the variable The current state is the first reference state, and thereby causes the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 for changing the variable current state.
  • the control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET, so the variable current state is changed Into the second reference state.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the second code difference DX11
  • the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the control signal SC15.
  • the functional unit 335 responds to the control signal SC15 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 included in the corresponding physical parameter range RY1ET from the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the variable current state is changed to the first reference state.
  • variable physical parameter QU1A is the first variable current.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are a first current reference range and a second current reference range, respectively.
  • the control code CC1L is preset based on a first designated current within the first current reference range.
  • the control code CC1T is preset based on a second designated current within the second current reference range.
  • the measurement time length value CL1T is preset in the designated count value format HQ21 based on the time length representation GC1KJ, the timer specification FW11, and the data encoding operation ZX1KJ.
  • the processing unit 230 causes the timer 539 to perform the counting operation BC1T based on the obtained measurement time length value CL1T.
  • the processing unit 230 experiences the application time length LT1T based on the counting operation BC1T.
  • the specific time TJ1T is reached, whereby the first variable current is maintained within the second current reference range within the application time length LT1T related to the counting operation BC1T.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are a first rotational speed reference range and a second rotational speed reference range, respectively.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter target range RD1ET are respectively a first temperature reference range and a second temperature reference range.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8031 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8032 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • each of the implementation structure 8031 and the implementation structure 8032 includes the control device 210, the control target device 330, and the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297, and the Storage unit 250.
  • the operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, the output unit 240, and the timer 539.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280, the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the input unit 270, the output unit 240, and the timer 539.
  • the output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to cause the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 within the first operation time TD11. For example, under the condition that the processing unit 230 obtains the first measurement value VN11, the processing unit 230 executes a method for checking the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L. The checking operation BV11 of a mathematical relationship KV11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located based on the checking operation BV11, the processing unit 230 performs a procedure for reaching the first operation The reasonable decision PW11 is whether the first trigger signal WX11 at the time TD11 is to be additionally generated. The first control signal SC11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the preset physical parameter range RD1EF used to make the reasonable decision PW11 is included in the multiple different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,..., and is included in the multiple different measured value reference ranges RN11 , RN12,... are represented by a preset measurement value range RN1F.
  • the preset measurement value range RN1F has a preset range limit value pair DN1F, and is represented by a preset measurement value range code EM1F included in the plurality of different measurement value reference range codes EM11, EM12,...
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes a physical parameter candidate range representation GC1F for representing the preset physical parameter range RD1EF.
  • the preset measurement value range RN1F is preset in the designated measurement value format HH11 based on one of the sensor measurement range indication GW1R and the sensor specification FU11.
  • the preset measurement value range RN1F is based on the physical parameter candidate range representing GC1F, the sensor measurement range representing GW1R, the sensor sensitivity representing GW11, and a data code for converting the physical parameter candidate range representing GC1F Operate ZX1F to be preset using the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the storage unit 250 stores an operation reference data XU21.
  • the operation reference data XU21 includes the preset range limit value pair DN1F and the preset measurement value range code EM1F, and is defaulted based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the physical parameter reference range RD1EF is configured to characterize an on state related to the switch.
  • the physical parameter reference range RD1EF is configured to characterize an on state related to the relay.
  • the physical parameter reference range RD1EF is configured to characterize an operating state related to the electric motor.
  • the physical parameter reference range RD1EF is configured to characterize one of an off state and a stopped state, or is configured to characterize one of an off state and an on state.
  • the first trigger signal WX11 is one of an interrupt request signal and a state change control signal. Under the condition that the timer 539 is caused to form an integer overflow, the timer 539 provides the interrupt request signal to the processing unit 230. The timer 539 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the control device 210 further includes a state change detector 477 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the state change detector 477 is one of a limit switch, a limit detector and an edge detector.
  • the state change detector 477 When the state change detector 477 detects that a characteristic physical parameter related to a default characteristic physical parameter UL21 reaches ZL22, the state change detector 477 provides the state change control signal to the processing Unit 230.
  • the state change detector 477 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the default characteristic physical parameter UL21 is related to the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the arrival of the characteristic physical parameter to ZL22 is caused based on the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the default characteristic physical parameter UL21 is a default limit position.
  • the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL22 is a limit position reaching.
  • the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 executes the determination for checking based on the operation reference data XU21 The first check operation ZY11 of the first range relationship KC1A between the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the preset physical parameter range RD1EF.
  • the processing unit 230 makes the first specific decision PD11 of whether the determined physical parameter application range RD1EL is the same as the preset physical parameter range RD1EF based on the first check operation ZY11. Under the condition that the first specific decision PD11 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 makes the reasonable decision PW11 to be affirmative.
  • the processing unit 230 under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the default control data
  • the code CK1T is configured to obtain the stored preset range limit value pair DN1F from the operation reference data XU21 stored in the storage unit 250, and the application range limit value obtained by comparing Perform a check for checking the determined first range relationship KC1A between the determined physical parameter application range RD1EL and the preset physical parameter range RD1EF on DN1L and the obtained preset range limit value pair DN1F
  • the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 is configured to retrieve all data stored in the storage unit 250
  • the operation reference data XU21 obtains the stored preset measurement value range code EM1F, and executes the operation by comparing the determined measurement value application range code EM1L with the obtained preset measurement value range code EM1F
  • the first check operation ZY11 of the first range relationship KC1A between the determined physical parameter application range RD1EL and the preset physical parameter range RD1EF is checked.
  • the processing unit 230 determines that the determined physical parameter application range RD1EL is the same as a physical parameter of the preset physical parameter range RD1EF, and borrows The first range relationship KC1A between the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the preset physical parameter range RD1EF determined by this identification is a first range equal relationship.
  • one of the control device 210 and the operating unit 297 responds to the first specific application related to the variable physical parameter QU1A Operate ZA11 to generate the first trigger signal WX11.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the first trigger signal WX11 to reach the first operation time TD11 dependent on the first trigger signal WX11.
  • the first specific application operation ZA11 is related to the timer 539 to control the GF11 for a time.
  • the functional unit 335 further includes a physical parameter application area AZ11 coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU11.
  • the physical parameter application area AZ11 has a variable physical parameter QG2A.
  • the first specific application operation ZA11 is a physical parameter application operation ZF11 executed by the functional unit 335 based on the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the physical parameter application operation ZF11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QG2A to reach the default characteristic physical parameter UL21 to form the characteristic physical parameter to reach ZL22.
  • the state change detector 477 is coupled to the physical parameter application area AZ11, and is used to detect that the characteristic physical parameter reaches ZL22.
  • the state change detector 477 generates the first trigger signal WX11 in response to the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL22.
  • the physical parameter application area AZ11 is one of a load area, a display area, a sensing area, a power supply area, and an environment area.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is further related to a variable time length LF2A.
  • the timer 539 is used to measure the variable time length LF2A.
  • the variable time length LF2A is characterized based on a reference time length LX11.
  • the storage unit 250 stores a measurement time length value CX11 related to the variable time length LF2A.
  • the measurement time length value CX11 is preset based on at least one of the reference time length LX11 and the timer specification FW11 in a designated count value format HQ23.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the measurement time length value CX11 from the storage unit 250, and performs the time control based on the obtained measurement time length value CX11 GF11 to control the timer 539.
  • the timer 539 executes a counting operation BC21 in response to the time control GF11.
  • the designated count value format HQ23 is characterized based on a designated number of bits UX23.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes a time length representation GC1KX, and the time length representation GC1KX is used to represent the reference time length LX11.
  • the measurement time length value CX11 is preset in the designated count value format HQ23 based on the time length representation GC1KX, the timer specification FW11, and a data encoding operation ZX1KX for converting the time length representation GC1KX .
  • the designated count value format HQ23 is the same as the designated count value format HQ21, whereby the designated number of bits UX23 is the same as the designated number of bits UX21.
  • the timer 539 experiences an application time length LT21 with an end time TZ21 by performing the counting operation BC21, and by forming a correlation with the counting operation BC21
  • the integer overflow reaches the end time TZ21, and the first trigger signal WX11 is generated in response to the integer overflow.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the first trigger signal WX11 to reach the first operation time TD11 dependent on the time control GF11, whereby the first operation time TD11 is adjacent to the end time TZ21.
  • the state change detector 477 is coupled to the physical parameter application area AZ11. Under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is affirmative, the state change detector 477 responds to the physical parameter application operating ZB11 to detect that the characteristic physical parameter reaches ZL22 to generate the first trigger signal WX11. For example, the functional unit 335 is controlled by the operating unit 397 to form the physical parameter application operation ZF11 in the physical parameter application area AZ11. Under the condition that the reasonable decision PW11 is negative, the processing unit 230 directly reaches the first operating time TD11 independent of the first trigger signal WX11, whereby the first operating time TD11 is adjacent to A valid time for PW11 to make the reasonable decision.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the memory unit 25Y1 stored in the second memory location PX1L based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L within the first operating time TD11 Control the data code CK1T, and execute the signal generation control GS11 for the measurement application function FC11 based on the accessed control data code CK1T to control the output unit 240.
  • the signal generation control GS11 provides the obtained control code CC1T to the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 obtains the control code CC1T from the processing unit 230 in response to the signal generation control GS11, and executes the first measurement application function FC11 based on the obtained control code CC1T.
  • a signal generation operation BS11 generates the first control signal SC11 within the first operation time TD11.
  • the first control signal SC11 conveys the obtained control code CC1T.
  • the processing unit 230 under the condition that the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 based on the data comparison CD21, the processing unit 230 is based on the The operation reference data XU21 is used to perform the second checking operation ZY21 for checking the determined second range relationship KC2A between the determined first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 and the preset physical parameter range RD1EF.
  • the processing unit 230 makes the second specific decision PW21 of whether the second trigger signal WX21 for reaching the second operation time TD21 is to be additionally generated based on the second check operation ZY21.
  • the second control signal SC12 that is different from the first control signal SC11 is to be generated within the second operation time TD21.
  • the second trigger signal WX21 is one of an interrupt request signal and a state change control signal.
  • the processing unit 230 Under the condition that the second specific decision PW21 is negative, the processing unit 230 directly reaches the second operation time TD21 independent of the second trigger signal WX21. Under the condition that the second specific decision PW21 is affirmative, one of the control device 210 and the operating unit 297 responds to the second specific application operation ZA21 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate The second trigger signal WX21. Under the condition that the second specific decision PW21 is affirmative, the processing unit 230 responds to the second trigger signal WX21 to reach the second operation time TD21 dependent on the second trigger signal WX21.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the memory unit 25Y1 based on the determined measurement value candidate range code EM12 within the second operating time TD21 to access the memory unit 25Y1 stored in the second operation time TD21
  • the control data code CK12 in the memory location PX12 is used to execute a signal generation control GS21 for the measurement application function FC11 based on the accessed control data code CK12 to control the output unit 240.
  • the signal generation control GS21 provides the control code CC13 included in the accessed control data code CK12 to the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 obtains the control code CC13 from the processing unit 230 in response to the signal generation control GS21, and executes the signal for the measurement application function FC11 based on the obtained control code CC1T
  • a generation operation BS21 is generated to generate the second control signal SC12 within the second operation time TD21.
  • the second control signal SC12 conveys the obtained control code CC13.
  • the second control signal SC12 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2 to enter the first one included in the plurality of different physical parameter reference ranges RD1E1, RD1E2, ... 2. Physical parameter candidate range RD1E3.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8033 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8034 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8035 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8036 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • each of the implementation structure 8032, the implementation structure 8033, the implementation structure 8034, and the implementation structure 8035 includes the control device 210, the The control target device 330 and the server 280 are described.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297, and the Storage unit 250.
  • the operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, the output unit 240, and a timer 542.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280, the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the input unit 270, the output unit 240, and the timer 542.
  • the output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330.
  • the timer 542 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and used to measure a clock time TH1A.
  • the timer 542 is configured to comply with a timer specification FW21.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is related to the clock time TH1A.
  • the clock time TH1A is characterized based on a plurality of different time reference intervals HP1E1, HP1E2,....
  • the multiple different time reference intervals HP1E1, HP1E2,... are respectively represented by multiple time value reference ranges GP11, GP12,..., and are arranged based on a default time reference interval sequence QB11.
  • the multiple time value reference ranges GP11, GP12, ... are arranged based on the default time reference interval order QB11.
  • the multiple time value reference ranges GP11, GP12, ... are preset based on the timer specification FW21 in a designated count value format HQ25, and are respectively determined by multiple time value reference range codes EF11, EF12, ... representative.
  • the storage unit 250 further has a plurality of different memory locations PS11, PS12,..., and stores a plurality of physical parameter designation range codes UD11, UD12,... in the multiple different memory locations PS11, PS12,..., respectively.
  • the multiple different time reference intervals HP1E1, HP1E2,... are respectively represented by multiple time reference interval codes.
  • the multiple time reference interval codes are configured to be equal to the multiple time value reference range codes EF11, EF12,...
  • the multiple time value reference range codes EF11, EF12,... are configured to respectively indicate the multiple different time reference intervals HP1E1, HP1E2,....
  • the designated count value format HQ25 is characterized based on a designated number of bits UX25.
  • the multiple time value reference range codes EF11, EF12, ... include a time value target range code EF1T and a time value candidate range code EF12.
  • the multiple different time reference intervals HP1E1, HP1E2,... include a time target interval HP1ET and a time candidate interval HP1E2.
  • the time value target range code EF1T and the time value candidate range code EF12 are configured to indicate the time target interval HP1ET and the time candidate interval HP1E2, respectively.
  • the multiple time value reference ranges GP11, GP12, ... include a time value target range GP1T and a time value candidate range GP12.
  • the time target interval HP1ET and the time candidate interval HP1E2 are respectively represented by the time value target range GP1T and the time value candidate range GP12.
  • the plurality of different memory locations PS11, PS12, ... are respectively identified based on the plurality of time value reference range codes EF11, EF12, ....
  • the multiple different memory locations PS11, PS12,... are identified based on multiple memory addresses FS11, FS12,..., or are identified by the multiple memory addresses FS11, FS12,..., respectively.
  • the multiple memory addresses FS11, FS12,... are preset based on the multiple time value reference range codes EF11, EF12,..., respectively.
  • the clock time TH1A is further characterized based on a nominal time interval HP1E.
  • the rated time interval HP1E includes the multiple different time reference intervals HP1E1, HP1E2,..., and is represented by a rated time value range HP1N.
  • the rated time value range HP1N includes the multiple time value reference ranges GP11, GP12, ..., and is preset in the designated count value format HQ25 based on the rated time interval HP1E and the timer specification FW21 .
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes a rated time interval representing GC1HE and a time reference interval representing GC1HP.
  • the rated time interval indicates that GC1HE is used to indicate the rated time interval HP1E.
  • the time reference interval representation GC1HP is used to indicate the multiple different time reference intervals HP1E1, HP1E2,....
  • the rated time value range HP1N is based on the rated time interval representing GC1HE, the timer specification FW21, and a data encoding operation ZX1HE for converting the rated time interval representing GC1HE to use the designated count value format HQ25.
  • the plurality of time value reference ranges GP11, GP12, ... use the designation based on the time reference interval indicating GC1HP, the timer specification FW21, and a data encoding operation ZX1HP for converting the time reference interval indicating GC1HP
  • the count value format HQ25 is preset.
  • the multiple physical parameter designated range codes UD11, UD12,... are configured to be stored based on the multiple time value reference range codes EF11, EF12,..., and include a physical parameter target range code UD1T and a physical parameter Candidate range code UD12.
  • the multiple physical parameter designated range codes UD11, UD12, ... are all selected from the multiple different measured value range codes EM11, EM12, ....
  • the physical parameter target range code UD1T represents a physical parameter target range GD1ET that the variable physical parameter QU1A is expected to be within the time target interval HP1ET, and is configured to be based on the time value target range code EF1T Stored in a memory location PS1T.
  • the memory location PS1T is identified based on a memory address FS1T.
  • the multiple time value reference range codes EL11, EL12,... are all defaulted based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the physical parameter candidate range code UD12 represents a physical parameter candidate range GD1E2 that the variable physical parameter QU1A is expected to be in the time candidate interval HP1E2, and is configured to be based on the time value candidate range code EF12 Stored in a memory location PS12.
  • the memory location PS12 is identified based on a memory address FS12.
  • the physical parameter target range GD1ET and the physical parameter candidate range GD1E2 are both selected from the plurality of different physical parameter ranges RD1E1, RD1E2,....
  • the time candidate interval HP1E2 is adjacent to the time target interval HP1ET.
  • the rated time value range HP1N and the multiple time value reference ranges GP11, GP12,... Are preset based on the timer specification FW21 in the designated count value format HQ25.
  • the physical parameter target range GD1ET is the same as the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the physical parameter candidate range GD1E2 is the same as the first physical parameter candidate range RD1E2. For example, there is a preset time interval between the time target interval HP1ET and the time candidate interval HP1E2.
  • the time value target range GP1T has a target range limit value pair DP1T.
  • the target range limit value pair DP1T includes a target range limit value DP17 of the time value target range GP1T and a target range limit value DP18 relative to the target range limit value DP17.
  • the time value target range GP1T and the target range limit value pair DP1T are preset based on the time target interval HP1ET and the timer specification FW21 in the designated count value format HQ25.
  • the time value candidate range GP12 has a candidate range limit value pair DP1B.
  • the candidate range limit value pair DP1B includes a candidate range limit value DP13 of the time value candidate range GP12 and a candidate range limit value DP14 relative to the candidate range limit value DP13.
  • the time value candidate range GP12 and the candidate range limit value pair DP1B are both preset based on the time candidate interval HP1E2 and the timer specification FW21 using the designated count value format HQ25.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes a time candidate interval representing GC1HT and a time candidate interval representing GC1H2.
  • the time candidate interval indicates that GC1HT is used to indicate the time target interval HP1ET.
  • the candidate time interval representation GC1H2 is used to indicate the candidate time interval HP1E2.
  • the time value target range GP1T and the target range limit value pair DP1T are based on the time candidate interval representing GC1HT, the timer specification FW21, and a data encoding operation ZX1HT for converting the time candidate interval representing GC1HT. It is preset with the specified count value format HQ25.
  • the time value candidate range GP12 and the candidate range limit value pair DP1B are based on the time candidate interval representation GC1H2, the timer specification FW21, and a data encoding operation ZX1H2 for converting the time candidate interval representation GC1H2. It is preset with the specified count value format HQ25.
  • the physical parameter target range code UD1T is equal to the preset measurement value target range code EM1T.
  • the storage unit 250 stores the target range limit value pair DP1T and the candidate range limit value pair DP1B.
  • the target range limit value pair DP1T and the candidate range limit value pair DP1B are preset based on the time value target range code EF1T and the time value candidate range code EF12, respectively.
  • the target range limit value pair DP1T and the candidate range limit value pair DP1B are stored in the storage unit 250 based on the time value target range code EF1T and the time value candidate range code EF12, respectively.
  • the timer 542 senses the clock time TH1A to generate a clock time signal SK11 that transmits a specific count value NP11. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 responds to the clock time signal SK11 to obtain the specific count value NP11 in the specified count value format HQ25.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the time value target range code EF1T, obtain the target range limit value pair DP1T from the storage unit 250 based on the obtained time value target range code EF1T, and by Compare the specific count value NP11 with the obtained target range limit value pair DP1T to perform a check operation ZP11 for checking a mathematical relationship WP11 between the specific count value NP11 and the time value target range GP1T .
  • the processing unit 230 determines the time value target range code EF1T based on the obtained time value target range code EF1T.
  • the memory address FS1T is obtained, and the physical parameter target range code UD1T stored in the memory location PS1T is accessed based on the obtained memory address FS1T to obtain the physical parameter target range code UD1T.
  • the processing unit 230 determines based on the check operation ZP11 that the clock time TH1A is currently within the time target interval HP1ET in a specific situation, and thereby identifies the clock time TH1A and the time target interval A range relationship between HP1ET is a specific relationship in which the clock time TH1A is currently within the time target interval HP1ET. For example, under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs, the processing unit 230 obtains the specific count value NP11 from the clock time signal SK11 in the specified count value format HQ25.
  • the processing unit 230 under the condition that the processing unit 230 obtains the physical parameter target range code UD1T from the memory location PS1T and determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, The processing unit 230 makes the obtained physical parameter target by performing a data comparison CP11 for comparing the obtained physical parameter target range code UD1T with the determined measurement value application range code EM1L. Whether the range code UD1T is equal to the determined measurement value application range code EM1L is a logical decision PP11.
  • the memory unit 25Y1 has a memory location PJ1T, and stores a control data code CJ1T in the memory location PJ1T.
  • the memory location PJ1T is identified based on the preset measurement value target range code EM1T.
  • the control data code CJ1T is equal to the control data code CK1T, and includes the control code CC1T and the measurement time length value CL1T.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the memory unit 25Y1 based on the physical parameter target range code UD1T obtained that is equal to the preset measurement value target range code EM1T.
  • the signal generation control GS11 of the measurement application function FC11 controls the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 obtains the control code CC1T from the processing unit 230 in response to the signal generation control GS11, and executes the control code CC1T within the operation time TD11 based on the obtained control code CC1T.
  • the first signal generation operation BS11 of the measurement application function FC11 is to generate the first control signal SC11.
  • the first control signal SC11 conveys the control code CC1T, and is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter that is the same as the physical parameter target range RD1ET Target range GD1ET.
  • the processing unit 230 executes the verification operation ZU11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A within the designated time TG12 after the operation time TD11. Under the condition that the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11, the verification operation ZU11 is based on the obtained physical parameter target range code UD1T, the accessed control data code CJ1T and the determined all One of the measurement value application range codes EM1L is used to determine the measurement value target range code EM1T to determine the measurement value target range RN1T.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET into which the variable physical parameter QU1A enters based on the verification operation ZU11, the processing unit 230 uses the storage unit 250 to store the determined The measurement value target range code EM1T is assigned to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the candidate time interval HP1E2 is adjacent to the time target interval HP1ET.
  • the timer 542 senses the clock time TH1A to generate a clock time signal SK12 that transmits a specific count value NP12.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the clock time signal SK12 within a specified time TX12 after the operating time TD11 to obtain the specified count value NP12 in the specified count value format HQ25.
  • the processing unit 230 Under the condition that the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11, the processing unit 230 obtains the time value candidate range by executing a scientific calculation MK12 using the obtained time value target range code EF1T Code EF12 to check a mathematical relationship WP12 between the obtained specific count value NP12 and the time value candidate range GP12. For example, the designated time TX12 is after the designated time TG12.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the candidate range limit value pair DP1B from the storage unit 250 based on the obtained time value candidate range code EF12, and compares the specific count value NP12 with the obtained
  • the candidate range limit value pair DP1B performs a check operation ZP12 for checking the mathematical relationship WP12 between the specific count value NP12 and the time value candidate range GP12.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the specific count value NP12 from the clock time signal SK12 in the designated count value format HQ25 within the designated time TX12.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the time candidate interval HP1E2 in which the clock time TH1A is located based on the check operation ZP12 within the specified time TX12, the processing unit 230 is based on the obtained Time value candidate range code EF12 to obtain the memory address FS12, and access the physical parameter candidate range stored in the memory location PS12 based on the obtained memory address FS12 within the specified time TX12 Code UD12 to obtain the physical parameter candidate range code UD12.
  • the processing unit 230 when the processing unit 230 obtains the physical parameter candidate range code UD12 from the memory location PS12 and the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter target range RD1ET, the The processing unit 230 performs a comparison between the physical parameter candidate range code UD12 obtained and the variable physical parameter range code UN1A equal to the measured value target range code EM1T by executing one of the variable physical parameter range codes UN1A within the specified time TX12. The data compares CP12 to make a logical decision PP12 whether the obtained physical parameter target range code UD1T is equal to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the processing unit 230 causes the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET through the output unit 240 to enter the same as the first physical parameter
  • the physical parameter candidate range GD1E2 of the candidate range RD1E2 is used, and the storage unit 250 is used to cause the variable physical parameter range code UN1A to change.
  • the plurality of physical parameter designated range codes UD11, UD12, ... belong to a physical parameter designated range code type TS11.
  • the physical parameter designated range code type TS11 is identified by a physical parameter designated range code type identifier HS11.
  • the physical parameter designation range code type identifier HS11 is preset.
  • the memory address FS1T is preset based on the preset physical parameter designation range code type identifier HS11 and the preset time value target range code EF1T.
  • the memory address FS12 is preset based on the preset physical parameter designation range code type identifier HS11 and the preset time value candidate range code EF12.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the physical parameter target range code UD1T, the preset physical parameter designated range code type identifier HS11, and the preset time The value target range code EF1T is obtained, and the memory address FS1T is obtained based on the obtained physical parameter designated range code type identifier HS11 and the obtained time value target range code EF1T.
  • the processing unit 230 provides a write request message WS1T to the storage unit 250 based on the acquired physical parameter target range code UD1T and the acquired memory address FS1T.
  • the write request information WS1T conveys the acquired physical parameter target range code UD1T and the acquired memory address FS1T.
  • the storage unit 250 receives the write request information WS1T, and responds to the write request information WS1T to store the received physical parameter target range code UD1T in the memory location PS1T.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the physical parameter candidate range code UD12 and the preset time value candidate range code EF12 in advance, and based on the obtained physical parameter Specify the range code type identifier HS11 and the obtained time value candidate range code EF12 to obtain the memory address FS12.
  • the processing unit 230 provides a write request message WS12 to the storage unit 250 based on the obtained physical parameter candidate range code UD12 and the obtained memory address FS12.
  • the write request information WS12 conveys the obtained physical parameter candidate range code UD12 and the obtained memory address FS12.
  • the storage unit 250 receives the write request information WS12, and responds to the write request information WS12 to store the received physical parameter candidate range code UD12 in the memory location PS12.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8037 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8037 includes the control device 210, the control target device 330, and the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297, and the Storage unit 250.
  • the control target device 330 includes the operation unit 397 and the function unit 335.
  • the operating unit 397 includes a processing unit 331, an input unit 337 coupled to the processing unit 331, an output unit 338 coupled to the processing unit 331, and the communication interface coupled to the processing unit 331 Unit 386.
  • the input unit 337 and the output unit 338 are both controlled by the processing unit 331.
  • the output unit 338 is coupled to the functional unit 335.
  • the operating unit 297 of the control device 210 is configured to communicate with the operating unit 397 by wire or wirelessly; therefore, the operating unit 297 is configured to wire to the operating unit 397.
  • the first control signal SC11 is transmitted ground or wirelessly.
  • the input unit 337 receives the first control signal SC11 from the control device 210 in a wired or wireless manner, and includes an input component 3371, an input component 3372, and an input component 3374.
  • the input component 3371, the input component 3372, and the input component 3374 are all coupled to the processing unit 331.
  • the first control signal SC11 is one of the electrical signal SP11 and the optical signal SQ11.
  • the input component 3371 is a receiver, and receives the electrical signal SP11 from the control device 210 under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the electrical signal SP11.
  • the input component 3372 is a reader, and receives the optical signal SQ11 for conveying the encoded image FY11 from the control device 210 under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the optical signal SQ11.
  • the encoded image FY11 is a barcode image.
  • the input component 3372 senses the encoded image FY11 to generate an encoded data DY11, and decodes the encoded data DY11 to provide the control
  • the code CC1T is sent to the processing unit 331.
  • the functional unit 335 has the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the input component 3371, the input component 3372, and the input component 3374 are all coupled to the processing unit 331. Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is provided by the control device 210, the input component 3374 receives the physical parameter signal SB11 from the control device 210. The functional unit 335 receives the physical parameter signal SB11 from the input component 3374.
  • the processing unit 331 causes the function unit 335 to use the physical parameter signal SB11 through the output unit 338 to form the variable physical parameter QU1A that depends on the physical parameter signal SB11.
  • the input component 3374 is a receiving component.
  • the output component 455 included in the control device 210 transmits the physical parameter signal SB11 to the input component 3374 wired or wirelessly.
  • the communication interface unit 386 includes the input component 3371 (or a receiver 3371) and an output component 3861 (or a transmitter 3861).
  • the communication interface unit 386 includes the input component 3371 (or a receiver 3371) and an output component 3861 (or a transmitter 3861).
  • the processing unit 331 causes the transmitter 3861 to transmit the control response signal SE11 to the receiving component 446 through the actual link LK2A.
  • the control device 210 performs one of a reading operation BR11 and a sensing operation BZ11 to output the physical parameter signal SB11.
  • the processing unit 230 executes the reading operation BR11 to read a physical parameter data record DU11 stored in one of the storage unit 250 and the server 280.
  • the control device 210 includes a sensing unit 560 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the sensing unit 560 senses a variable physical parameter QL1A by performing the sensing operation BZ11 to cause the output component 455 to output the physical parameter signal SB11.
  • the control device 210 transmits the first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330 through the actual link LK1A between the output unit 240 and the input unit 337.
  • the actual link LK1A is one of a wired link and a wireless link LK11.
  • the sensing unit 560 is coupled to the operating unit 297 and is controlled by the processing unit 230 to sense the variable physical parameter QL1A.
  • variable physical parameter QU1A belongs to the physical parameter type TU11.
  • the variable physical parameter QL1A belongs to a physical parameter type TL11.
  • the physical parameter type TU11 is the same as or different from the physical parameter type TL11.
  • the control device 210 is in the application environment EX11.
  • One of the control device 210 and the application environment EX11 has the variable physical parameter QL1A.
  • the physical parameter data record DU11 is provided in advance based on a variable physical parameter QY1A.
  • the variable physical parameter QY1A belongs to the physical parameter type TL11.
  • the physical parameter type TU11 is different from a time type.
  • the processing unit 331 obtains the control code CC1T from the first control signal SC11 in response to the first control signal SC11, and executes the control code CC1T based on the obtained control code CC1T.
  • a signal of the physical parameter control function FA11 generates a control GY11 to control the output unit 338.
  • the output unit 338 generates the function signal SG11 in response to the signal generation control GY11.
  • the function signal SG11 is one of a control signal, a pulse width modulation signal, a level signal, and a driving signal.
  • the functional unit 335 includes a driving circuit 3355 and a physical parameter forming part 3351 coupled to the driving circuit 3355.
  • the physical parameter forming part 3351 is used to form the variable physical parameter QU1A, and includes the physical parameter forming area AU11.
  • the driving circuit 3355 is coupled to the input component 3374 and the output unit 338, and is controlled by the processing unit 331 through the output unit 338.
  • the driving circuit 3355 receives the physical parameter signal SB11 from the input component 3374, receives the function signal SG11 from the output unit 338, and responds to the function signal SG11 to process the physical parameter signal SB11 to output a Drive signal SL11.
  • the functional unit 335 further includes a supporting portion 335K.
  • the driving circuit 3355, the physical parameter forming part 3351 and the sensing unit 334 are all coupled to the supporting part 335K.
  • the physical parameter forming part 3351 receives the driving signal SL11, and responds to the driving signal SL11 to make the variable physical parameter QU1A within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the processing unit 331 executes the signal generation control GY11 in response to the received first control signal SC11.
  • the output unit 338 performs a signal generation operation BY11 for the physical parameter control function FA11 in response to the signal generation control GY11 to provide the function signal SG11 to the driving circuit 3355.
  • the driving circuit 3355 drives the physical parameter forming part 3351 in response to the function signal SG11 to make the variable physical parameter QU1A enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the variable physical parameter QL1A is a second variable electrical parameter, a second variable mechanical parameter, a second variable optical parameter, a second variable temperature, a second variable voltage, a second Variable current, a second variable electric power, a second variable resistor, a second variable capacitor, a second variable inductance, a second variable frequency, a second clock time, a second Variable time length, a second variable brightness, a second variable light intensity, a second variable volume, a second variable data flow, a second variable amplitude, a second variable spatial position, A second variable displacement, a second variable sequence position, a second variable angle, a second variable space length, a second variable distance, a second variable translation speed, a second variable One of angular velocity, a second variable acceleration, a second variable force, a second variable pressure, and a second variable mechanical power.
  • the variable physical parameter QY1A is a third variable electrical parameter, a third variable mechanical parameter, a third variable optical parameter, a third variable temperature, a third variable voltage, a third Variable current, a third variable electric power, a third variable resistor, a third variable capacitor, a third variable inductance, a third variable frequency, a third clock time, a third Variable time length, a third variable brightness, a third variable light intensity, a third variable volume, a third variable data flow, a third variable amplitude, a third variable spatial position, A third variable displacement, a third variable sequence position, a third variable angle, a third variable space length, a third variable distance, a third variable translation speed, a third variable One of angular velocity, a third variable acceleration, a third variable force, a third variable pressure, and a third variable mechanical power.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8038 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8038 includes the control device 210, the control target device 330, and the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297, and the Storage unit 250.
  • the operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280, the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330.
  • the memory unit 25Y1 has the first memory location PN1L and a memory location PJ1L different from the first memory location PN1L, and the application range limit value is stored in the first memory location PN1L
  • a control data code CJ1L is stored in the memory location PJ1L
  • the memory unit 25Y1 further has a memory location PN1T and the memory location PJ1T different from the memory location PN1T, the target range limit value pair DN1T is stored in the memory location PN1T, and is stored in the memory location PJ1T The control data code CJ1T.
  • Both the first memory location PN1L and the memory location PJ1L are identified based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L. Both the memory location PN1T and the memory location PJ1T are identified based on the preset measurement value target range code EM1T.
  • the control data code CJ1L includes the control code CC1L and a measurement time length value CL1L.
  • the measurement time length value CL1L is preset in the designated count value format HQ21 based on at least one of a reference time length LJ1L and the timer specification FW11.
  • the control data code CJ1T includes the control code CC1T and the measurement time length value CL1T.
  • the control data code CJ1L and the control data code CJ1T both belong to a control data code type TK21.
  • the control data code type TK21 is identified by a control data code type identifier HK21. For example, the control data code type identifier HK21 is preset.
  • the memory location PJ1L is identified based on a memory address FJ1L, or is identified by the memory address FJ1L.
  • the memory location PJ1T is identified based on a memory address FJ1T, or is identified by the memory address FJ1T.
  • the memory address FJ1L is preset based on the preset measurement value application range code EM1L and the default control data code type identifier HK21.
  • the memory address FJ1T is preset based on the preset measurement value target range code EM1T and the default control data code type identifier HK21.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes a time length representation GC1KL, and the time length representation GC1KL is used to represent the reference time length LJ1L.
  • the measurement time length value CL1L is preset in the designated count value format HQ21 based on the time length representation GC1KL, the timer specification FW11, and a data encoding operation ZX1KL for converting the time length representation GC1KL .
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes the sensor specification FU11, the timer specification FW11, and the timer specification FW21.
  • control data code CJ1L is preset based on one of the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the control data code CJ1T is preset based on one of the physical parameter target range RD1ET and the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the control data code type identifier HK21.
  • the processing unit 230 determines that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 performs a scientific calculation using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L MN11 obtains the preset measurement value target range code EM1T, and obtains the memory address FJ1T based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T and the obtained control data code type identifier HK21.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the control data code CJ1T stored in the memory location PJ1T based on the obtained memory address FJ1T, and based on the accessed control data Code CJ1T is used to execute the signal generation control GS11 for the measurement application function FC11 to control the output unit 240.
  • the signal generation control GS11 provides the control code CC1T in the accessed control data code CJ1T to the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 obtains the control code CC1T from the processing unit 230 in response to the signal generation control GS11, and generates the first control signal SC11 based on the obtained control code CC1T.
  • the control data code CJ1T is the same as the control data code CK1T.
  • the target range limit value pair DN1T belongs to the measurement range limit data code type TN11.
  • the memory location PN1T is identified based on a memory address FN1T, or is identified by the memory address FN1T.
  • the memory address FN1T is preset based on the preset measurement value target range code EM1T and the preset measurement range limit data code type identifier HN11.
  • the verification operation ZU11 obtains the memory address FN1T based on the obtained measurement range limit data code type identifier HN11 and the determined or obtained measurement value target range code EM1T, and based on the obtained all
  • the memory address FN1T is used to access the target range limit value pair DN1T stored in the memory location PN1T to obtain the target range limit value pair DN1T.
  • the processing unit 230 performs the calculation based on the counting operation BC1T.
  • the application time length LT1T with the end time TZ1T is passed to reach the specific time TJ1T.
  • the processing unit 230 executes a scientific calculation MN12 using the measurement value target range code EM1T within the specific time TJ1T to obtain the preset measurement value application range code EM1L, and is based on the determined measurement value range code EM1L.
  • the measurement value uses the range code EM1L and the obtained control data code type identifier HK21 to obtain the memory address FJ1L.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the memory unit 25Y1 to access the control data code CJ1L stored in the memory location PJ1L based on the obtained memory address FJ1L. Under the condition that the control code CC22 is the same as the control code CC1L, the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS22 for the measurement application function FC11 based on the accessed control data code CJ1L Control the output unit 240. For example, the signal generation control GS22 provides the control code CC1L in the accessed control data code CJ1L to the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 responds to the signal generation control GS21 to obtain the control code CC22 of the same control code CC1L from the processing unit 230, and
  • the third control signal SC22 is generated based on the obtained control code CC22.
  • the control data code CJ1L is the same as the control data code CK12.
  • the third control signal SC22 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the physical parameter application range RD1EL .
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8039 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8039 includes the control device 210, the control target device 330, and the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297, and the Storage unit 250.
  • the operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280, the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330.
  • the input unit 337 receives a control signal SC10 from the transmission component 450.
  • the processing unit 331 executes a signal generation control GY10 for controlling the output unit 338 in response to the received control signal SC10.
  • the output unit 338 generates a function signal SG10 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A in response to the signal generation control GY10, and provides the function signal SG10 to the function unit 335.
  • the function unit 335 receives the function signal SG10 from the output unit 338, and executes the specific function operation ZH11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A in response to the received function signal SG10.
  • the specific functional operation ZH11 causes the variable physical parameter QG1A to reach the default characteristic physical parameter UL11 to form the characteristic physical parameter.
  • the parameter reaches ZL12.
  • the state change detector 475 generates the trigger signal SX1A in response to the characteristic physical parameter reaching ZL12.
  • the input unit 270 is coupled to the state change detector 475 and receives the trigger signal SX1A.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the trigger signal SX1A.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L Under the condition of the application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 causes the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the trigger application unit 281 is related to a trigger event EQ10, generates an operation request signal SX10 in response to the trigger event EQ10, provides the operation request signal SX10 to the processing unit 230, and thereby causes the processing unit 230 receives the operation request signal SX10.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SX10 to cause the output unit 240 to transmit the control signal SC10 to the input unit 337.
  • control target device 330 further includes a supporting portion 330K.
  • the operating unit 397, the functional unit 335, and the sensing unit 334 are all coupled to the supporting portion 330K.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the memory based on the determined measurement value application range code EM1L
  • the unit 25Y1 accesses the control data code CK1T stored in the second memory location PX1L, and generates the first control signal SC11 based on the accessed control data code CK1T.
  • the control data code CK1T includes the control code CC1T.
  • the control code CC1T is preset based on the physical parameter representation GC1T1 and the third data encoding operation ZX21 for converting the physical parameter representation GC1T1.
  • the physical parameter representation GC1T1 is used to represent the designated physical parameter QD1T within the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the designated physical parameter QD1T is designated based on the default characteristic physical parameter UL11.
  • the measurement application function specification GCL1 includes a physical parameter representation GC1UL for representing the default characteristic physical parameter UL11.
  • the physical parameter representation GC1T1 is provided based on the physical parameter representation GC1UL.
  • the operating unit 297 further includes a connection terminal 294 coupled to at least one of the processing unit 230 and the output unit 240.
  • the control target device 330 further includes a connection terminal 394 coupled to the sensing unit 334 and the input unit 337.
  • the signal cable 247 is coupled to the connection terminal 294 and the connection terminal 394, and is used to transmit the first control signal SC11 and the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the signal cable 247 includes a transmission line 2471 and a transmission line 2472.
  • the transmission line 2471 is used to transmit at least one of the first control signal SC11, the second control signal SC12, and the third control signal SC22, and has a first end and a second end.
  • the first end is coupled to the output unit 240 through the connection terminal 294.
  • the second end is coupled to the input unit 337 through the connection terminal 394.
  • the transmission line 2472 is used to transmit at least one of the first sensing signal SN11 and the second sensing signal SN12, and has a third end and a fourth end.
  • the third end is coupled to the processing unit 230 through the connection terminal 294.
  • the fourth terminal is coupled to the sensing unit 334 through the connection terminal 394.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8040 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8041 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8042 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8043 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • each of the implementation structure 8040, the implementation structure 8041, the implementation structure 8042, and the implementation structure 8043 includes the control device 210, the The control target device 330 and the server 280 are described.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297, and the Storage unit 250.
  • the operation unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280, the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330.
  • the control device 210 further includes an electricity usage target 275 and an electricity usage target 276 related to the electricity usage target 275.
  • the power usage target 275 and the power usage target 276 are both coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the electricity usage target 275 is identified by an electricity usage target identifier HZ11, and is an electricity usage unit.
  • the electricity usage target 276 is identified by an electricity usage target identifier HZ12 and is an electricity usage unit.
  • the power usage target identifier HZ11 and the power usage target identifier HZ12 are both defaulted based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the storage unit 250 has a memory location PK11 and a memory location PK12 different from the memory location PK11.
  • the storage unit 250 stores a relative value VK11 representing a preset increment in the memory location PK11, and stores a relative value VK12 representing a preset decrement in the memory location PK12.
  • the electrical application target WJ11 is one of the electrical application target 275 and the electrical application target 276.
  • the electricity usage target 275 and the electricity usage target 276 are respectively located in different spatial positions.
  • the memory location PK11 is identified by a memory address FK11, or is identified based on the memory address FK11.
  • the memory location PK12 is identified by a memory address FK12, or is identified based on the memory address FK12.
  • the memory address FK11 is preset based on the power usage target identifier HZ11; thereby, the power usage target 275 is related to the relative value VK11.
  • the memory address FK12 is preset based on the power usage target identifier HZ12; thereby, the power usage target 276 is related to the relative value VK12.
  • the power usage target 275 is related to the relative value VK11.
  • KV2W between the power usage target identifier HZ12 and the relative value VK12; thereby, the power usage target 276 is related to the relative value VK12.
  • the power usage target 275 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have a first physical quantity change to change the variable current state of the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the electricity usage target 276 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have a second physical quantity change opposite to the first physical quantity change to change the variable current state of the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on one of the power usage target 275 and the power usage target 276, and causes the processing unit 230 to receive the operation request signal SZ11. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 depends on the electricity usage target 275, the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SZ11 to obtain the electricity usage target identifier HZ11, and based on the obtained electricity usage target identifier HZ11 The target identifier HZ11 is used to obtain the relative value VK11.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SZ11 to obtain the electricity usage target identifier HZ12, and based on the obtained electricity usage target identifier HZ12 The target identifier HZ12 is used to obtain the relative value VK12.
  • the trigger event EQ11 is a user input event when the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JU11.
  • the input unit 270 generates an operation request signal SZ11 in response to the trigger event EQ11 which is the user input event, provides the operation request signal SZ11 to the processing unit 230, and thereby causes the processing unit 230 to The operation request signal SZ11 is received.
  • the input unit 270 relies on the power usage target 275 to provide an input signal SM17 to the processing unit 230.
  • the input unit 270 relies on the power usage target 276 to provide an input signal SM18 to the processing unit 230.
  • the operation request signal SZ11 is one of the input signal SM17 and the input signal SM18.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the operation request signal SZ11.
  • the user input operation JU11 is one of a user input operation JW11 and a user input operation JW12. In a first specific situation, the user input operation JU11 is the user input operation JW11. In a second specific situation, the user input operation JU11 is the user input operation JW12.
  • the storage unit 250 stores the relative value VK11 and the relative value VK12 different from the relative value VK11. For example, the relative value VK11 is proportional to 1, or equal to 1. The relative value VK12 is proportional to (-1), or equal to (-1).
  • the input unit 270 receives the user input operation JW11 for selecting the power usage target 275 to cause the trigger event EQ11 to occur.
  • the input unit 270 generates the input signal SM17 as the operation request signal SZ11 in response to the user input operation JW11.
  • the processing unit 230 receives the input signal SM17, uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the input signal SM17, and performs a data acquisition in response to the input signal SM17 AD2A obtains the power usage target identifier HZ11.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L Under the condition of the application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 obtains the relative value VK11 based on the obtained electric use target identifier HZ11. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the memory address FK11 based on the obtained power usage target identifier HZ11, and accesses all stored in the memory location PK11 based on the obtained memory address FK11. The relative value VK11 is used to obtain the relative value VK11. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the relative value VK11 by executing a scientific calculation MR15 using the obtained electric usage target identifier HZ11 and the mathematical relationship KV1W.
  • the determined application range RD1EL of the physical parameter is indicated by the determined application range code EM1L of the measurement value.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the preset measurement value target range code EM1T by executing a scientific calculation MQ15 using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L and the obtained relative value VK11, and Based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T, the memory unit 25Y1 is used to access the control data code CJ1T stored in the memory location PJ1T to obtain the control code CC1T.
  • the scientific calculation MQ15 includes a first arithmetic operation using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L and the obtained relative value VK11.
  • the processing unit 230 executes the processing within the operating time TD11 based on the accessed control data code CJ1T
  • the signal generation control GS11 of the measurement application function FC11 causes the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 that transmits the control code CC1T.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET has a first specific physical parameter range limit and a second specific physical parameter range limit relative to the first specific physical parameter range limit.
  • the operation unit 397 of the control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have the first physical quantity change to change the Change the variable current state of the physical parameter QU1A.
  • the operation unit 397 of the control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to change from the The physical parameter application range RD1EL passes through the boundary of the first specific physical parameter range to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the first specific physical parameter range limit is one of the default physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 and the default physical parameter target range limit ZD1T2.
  • the first physical quantity change is one of a first physical increment and a first physical decrement.
  • the relative value VK11 is configured to be equal to a positive integer.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL is adjacent to the first specific physical parameter range limit.
  • the input unit 270 receives the user input operation JW12 for selecting the power usage target 276 to cause the trigger event EQ11 to occur.
  • the input unit 270 generates the input signal SM18 as the operation request signal SZ11 in response to the user input operation JW12.
  • the processing unit 230 receives the input signal SM18, uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the input signal SM18, and performs a data acquisition in response to the input signal SM18 AD2B obtains the power usage target identifier HZ12.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L Under the condition of the application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 obtains the relative value VK12 based on the obtained electric use target identifier HZ12. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the memory address FK12 based on the obtained power usage target identifier HZ12, and accesses all stored in the memory location PK12 based on the obtained memory address FK12. The relative value VK12 is used to obtain the relative value VK12. For example, the processing unit 230 obtains the relative value VK12 by executing a scientific calculation MR16 using the obtained electric usage target identifier HZ12 and the mathematical relationship KV2W.
  • the determined application range RD1EL of the physical parameter is indicated by the determined application range code EM1L of the measurement value.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the preset measurement value target range code EM1T by executing a scientific calculation MQ16 using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L and the obtained relative value VK12, and Based on the obtained measurement value target range code EM1T, the memory unit 25Y1 is used to access the control data code CJ1T stored in the memory location PJ1T to obtain the control code CC1T.
  • the scientific calculation MQ16 includes a second arithmetic operation using the determined measurement value application range code EM1L and the obtained relative value VK12.
  • the processing unit 230 executes the measurement application function FC11 within the operation time TD11 based on the accessed control data code CJ1T
  • the signal generation control GS11 causes the output unit 240 to generate the first control signal SC11 that transmits the measurement value target range code EM1T.
  • the operation unit 397 of the control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to have the opposite change of the first physical quantity The second physical quantity is changed to change the variable current state of the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the operation unit 397 of the control target device 330 responds to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to change from the
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL passes through the boundary of the second specific physical parameter range to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the second specific physical parameter range limit is the other of the default physical parameter target range limit ZD1T1 and the default physical parameter target range limit ZD1T2.
  • the second physical quantity change is one of a second physical increment and a second physical decrement.
  • the relative value VK12 is configured to be equal to a negative integer.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL is adjacent to the boundary of the second specific physical parameter range.
  • the second specific physical parameter range limit is different from the first specific physical parameter range limit.
  • the storage unit 250 further has a memory location PF11 and a memory location PF12 different from the memory location PF11.
  • the storage unit 250 stores the preset electricity use target identifier HZ11 in the memory location PF11, and stores the preset electricity use target identifier HZ12 in the memory location PF12.
  • the memory location PF11 is identified by a memory address FF11, or is identified based on the memory address FF11.
  • the memory location PF12 is identified by a memory address FF12, or is identified based on the memory address FF12.
  • the power usage target 275 is coupled to the memory location PF11 through the processing unit 230.
  • the power usage target 276 is coupled to the memory location PF12 through the processing unit 230.
  • the input signal SM17 conveys an input data DJ17.
  • the input signal SM18 conveys an input data DJ18.
  • the data acquisition AD2A is one of a data acquisition operation AD21 and a data acquisition operation AD22.
  • the data acquisition operation AD21 accesses the electricity use target identifier HZ11 stored in the memory location PF11 by using the default memory address FF11 to obtain the preset electricity use target identifier HZ11.
  • the data acquisition operation AD22 processes the input data DJ17 based on a default data derivation rule YU11 to obtain the preset power usage target identifier HZ11.
  • the data acquisition AD2B is one of a data acquisition operation AD23 and a data acquisition operation AD24.
  • the data acquisition operation AD23 accesses the electricity use target identifier HZ12 stored in the memory location PF12 by using the default memory address FF12 to obtain the preset electricity use target identifier HZ12.
  • the data acquisition operation AD24 processes the input data DJ18 based on the default data derivation rule YU11 to obtain the preset power usage target identifier HZ12.
  • the control device 210 is used by the user 295 and includes a user interface area AP21 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the user interface area AP21 has the power usage target 275 and the power usage target 276, or the power usage target 275 and the power usage target 276 are both located in the user interface area AP21.
  • the input unit 270 includes the input component 440.
  • the output unit 240 includes the display component 460.
  • one of the input component 440 and the display component 460 includes the user interface area AP21.
  • the user interface area AP21 is the user interface area AP11, and has the power usage target 275 and the power usage target 276.
  • the power usage target 275 is one of a first sensing target and a first display target. Under the condition that the electricity usage target 275 is the first sensing target, the input component 440 includes the electricity usage target 275. Under the condition that the power usage target 275 is the first display target, the display component 460 includes the power usage target 275.
  • the first sensing target is a first button target.
  • the first display target is a first icon target.
  • the power usage target 276 is one of a second sensing target and a second display target. Under the condition that the electricity usage target 276 is the second sensing target, the input component 440 includes the electricity usage target 276. Under the condition that the power usage target 276 is the second display target, the display component 460 includes the power usage target 276.
  • the second sensing target is a second button target.
  • the second display target is a second icon target.
  • the input unit 270 relies on the power usage target 275 to provide the input signal SM17 to the processing unit 230.
  • the input unit 270 relies on the power usage target 276 to provide the input signal SM18 to the processing unit 230.
  • the power usage target 275 receives the user input operation JW11 to cause the input component 440 to provide the input signal SM17 to The processing unit 230.
  • the input unit 270 further includes a pointing device 441.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to cause the display component 460 to display a selection tool YJ11, the electricity usage target 275, and the electricity usage target 276.
  • the pointing device 441 is used to control the selection tool YJ11. Under the condition that the power usage target 275 is configured to exist in the display component 460, the pointing device 441 receives the user input operation JW11 for selecting the power usage target 275 to cause the pointing device 441
  • the input signal SM17 is provided to the processing unit 230.
  • the user input operation JW11 is configured to rely on the pointing device 441 and the selection tool YJ11 to select the power usage target 275.
  • the selection tool YJ11 is a cursor.
  • the power usage target 276 receives the user input operation JW12 to cause the input component 440 to provide the input signal SM18 to The processing unit 230.
  • the pointing device 441 receives the user input operation JW12 for selecting the power usage target 276 to cause the pointing device 441
  • the input signal SM18 is provided to the processing unit 230.
  • the user input operation JW12 is configured to rely on the pointing device 441 and the selection tool YJ11 to select the power usage target 276.
  • FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8044 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8045 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8046 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • each of the implementation structure 8044, the implementation structure 8045, and the implementation structure 8046 includes the control device 210, the control target device 330, and the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the sensing unit 334, the operating unit 297, and the Storage unit 250.
  • the operating unit 297 includes the processing unit 230, the input unit 270, the output unit 240, and a timer 546 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280, the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 250, the input unit 270, and the output unit 240.
  • the output unit 240 is coupled to the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 includes the operating unit 397, the functional unit 335, and a functional unit 735 coupled to the operating unit 397.
  • the operating unit 397 has an output terminal 338P and an output terminal 338Q.
  • the output terminal 338P is coupled to the functional unit 335.
  • the functional unit 735 includes a physical parameter formation area AU21 and is coupled to the output terminal 338Q.
  • the output terminal 338P and the output terminal 338Q are respectively located at different spatial positions.
  • the physical parameter formation area AU21 has the variable physical parameter QU2A.
  • the control device 210 further includes a multiplexer 263 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the multiplexer 263 has an input terminal 2631, an input terminal 2632, a control terminal 263C, and an output terminal 263P.
  • the control terminal 263C is coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the functional unit 735 is a physically implementable functional unit and has a functional structure similar to the functional unit 335.
  • the functional unit 735 is a functional target.
  • the input terminal 2631 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU11.
  • the input terminal 2632 is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU21.
  • the output terminal 263P is coupled to the sensing unit 334.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A and the variable physical parameter QU2A are a fourth variable electrical parameter and a fifth variable electrical parameter, respectively.
  • the fourth variable electrical parameter and the fifth variable electrical parameter are a fourth variable voltage and a fifth variable voltage, respectively.
  • the first functional relationship is equal to one of a first on relationship and a first off relationship.
  • the second functional relationship is equal to one of a second on-state relationship and a second off-state relationship.
  • the sensing unit 334 is configured to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A through the output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2631, It is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU11 through the output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2631.
  • the sensing unit 334 is configured to sense the variable physical parameter QU2A through the output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2632, It is coupled to the physical parameter formation area AU21 through the output terminal 263P and the input terminal 2632.
  • the multiplexer 263 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and is an analog multiplexer.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A through the multiplexer 263 at an operating time TX11, and passes the multiplexer at an operating time TX11 that is different from the operating time TX11.
  • the device 263 senses the variable physical parameter QU2A.
  • the functional unit 335 is identified by a functional unit identifier HA2T.
  • the functional unit 735 is identified by a functional unit identifier HA22.
  • the functional unit 335 and the functional unit 735 are respectively located in different spatial positions, and both are coupled to the processing unit 230 through the operating unit 397 and the output unit 240.
  • the functional unit identifier HA2T and the functional unit identifier HA22 are both defaulted based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the control device 210 further includes an electricity usage target 285 coupled to the processing unit 230 and an electricity usage target 286 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the functional unit identifier HA2T is configured to indicate the output terminal 338P, and is a first functional unit number.
  • the functional unit identifier HA22 is configured to indicate the output terminal 338Q, and is a second functional unit number.
  • the functional unit 335 is identified by a functional unit identifier HA2T.
  • the functional unit 735 is identified by a functional unit identifier HA22.
  • the functional unit 335 and the functional unit 735 are respectively located in different spatial positions, and both are coupled to the processing unit 230 through the operating unit 397 and the output unit 240.
  • the functional unit identifier HA2T and the functional unit identifier HA22 are both defaulted based on the measurement application function specification GCL1.
  • the control device 210 further includes an electricity usage target 285 coupled to the processing unit 230 and an electricity usage target 286 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the functional unit identifier HA2T is a first functional unit number.
  • the functional unit identifier HA22 is a second functional unit number.
  • the electricity usage target 285 is identified by an electricity usage target identifier HZ2T, and is an electricity usage unit.
  • the electricity usage target 286 is identified by an electricity usage target identifier HZ22 and is an electricity usage unit.
  • the electricity use target identifier HZ2T and the electricity use target identifier HZ22 are both defaulted based on the measurement application function specification GCL1. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the power usage target 285, the processing unit 230 selects the functional unit 335 for control in response to the trigger event EQ11. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 occurs depending on the power usage target 286, the processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to select the functional unit 735 for control.
  • the storage unit 250 has a memory location XC2T and a memory location XC22.
  • the functional unit identifier HA2T is stored in the memory location XC2T, and the functional unit identifier HA22 is stored in the memory location XC22.
  • the memory location XC2T is identified by a memory address EC2T, or is identified based on the memory address EC2T.
  • the memory address EC2T is preset based on the power usage target identifier HZ2T; thereby, the power usage target 285 is related to the functional unit identifier HA2T. For example, there is a mathematical relationship KK21 between the power usage target identifier HZ2T and the functional unit identifier HA2T; thereby, the power usage target 285 is related to the functional unit identifier HA2T.
  • the memory location XC22 is identified by a memory address EC22, or is identified based on the memory address EC22.
  • the memory address EC22 is preset based on the power usage target identifier HZ22; thereby, the power usage target 286 is related to the functional unit identifier HA22.
  • the power usage target identifier HZ22 and the functional unit identifier HA22 have a mathematical relationship KK22; thereby, the power usage target 286 is related to the functional unit identifier HA22.
  • the functional unit 335 and the functional unit 735 are separated or separated by a material layer 70U disposed between the functional unit 335 and the functional unit 735.
  • the functional unit 335, the material layer 70U, and the functional unit 735 are all coupled to a supporting medium 70M.
  • the control target device 330 includes the material layer 70U, or the material layer 70U is disposed outside the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 includes the support medium 70M, or the support medium 70M is disposed outside the control target device 330.
  • the processing unit 230 is caused to receive an operation request signal SZ21 under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 depends on the power usage target 285 to occur.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the first measured value VN11 and the power usage target identifier HZ2T in response to the operation request signal SZ21, and obtains the functional unit based on the obtained power usage target identifier HZ2T Identifier HA2T.
  • the processing unit 230 causes one of the output component 450 and the output component 455 to transmit the first control signal SC11, the first control signal SC11, the Any one of the second control signal SC12 and the third control signal SC22 is used to control the functional unit 335.
  • the trigger event EQ11 is a user input event in which the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JU21.
  • the input unit 270 generates the operation request signal SZ21 in response to the trigger event EQ11 which is the user input event, provides the operation request signal SZ21 to the processing unit 230, and thereby causes the processing unit to 230 receives the operation request signal SZ21.
  • the input unit 270 relies on the power usage target 285 to provide the operation request signal SZ21 to the processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SZ21 to provide a control signal SV11 to the control terminal 263C.
  • control signal SV11 is a selection control signal and functions as an instruction to the input terminal 2631.
  • the multiplexer 263 responds to the control signal SV11 to cause the first functional relationship between the input terminal 2631 and the output terminal 263P to be equal to the first conduction relationship.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the processing unit 230 receives the first sensing signal SN11 from the sensing unit 334, and obtains the first measurement in the specified measurement value format HH11 based on the received first sensing signal SN11 Value VN11.
  • the power usage target 285 and the power usage target 286 are configured to correspond to the functional unit 335 and the functional unit 735, respectively, are coupled to the processing unit 230, and are located at different spatial positions.
  • the user interface area AP21 is the user interface area AP11, and has the power usage target 285 and the power usage target 286.
  • the input unit 270 receives the user input operation JU21 for selecting the power usage target 285 to cause the trigger event EQ11 to occur.
  • the input unit 270 generates the operation request signal SZ21 in response to the user input operation JU21.
  • the processing unit 230 receives the operation request signal SZ21, uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the operation request signal SZ21, and performs execution in response to the operation request signal SZ21 A data acquisition AD2C to obtain the electricity use target identifier HZ2T.
  • the storage unit 250 includes the storage space SS11.
  • the storage space SS11 has the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A, the variable physical parameter range code UN1A, the electricity use target identifier HZ2T, the electricity use target identifier HZ22, and the function
  • the limit value of the time length range is LN1A.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to obtain the memory address EC2T based on the obtained power usage target identifier HZ2T, and access the memory address stored in the memory location XC2T based on the obtained memory address EC2T.
  • the functional unit identifier HA2T is used to obtain the functional unit identifier HA2T.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter in which the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently located by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L Under the conditions of the application range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 executes the signal generation control GS11 based on the obtained functional unit identifier HA2T and the accessed control data code CK1T to cause the output component 450 and One of the output components 455 generates the first control signal SC11, and causes one of the output component 450 and the output component 455 to transmit the first control signal SC11 to the communication interface unit 386.
  • the first control signal SC11 conveys the functional unit identifier HA2T.
  • the first control signal SC11 transmits the functional unit identifier HA2T configured to indicate the output terminal 338P to enable the processing unit 331 to select the functional unit 335 for control.
  • the first control signal SC11 conveys the functional unit identifier HA2T and the control code CC1T.
  • the operating unit 397 obtains the control code CC1T and the functional unit identifier HA2T from the first control signal SC11 in response to the first control signal SC11, and based on the obtained control code CC1T and the obtained
  • the functional unit identifier HA2T is used to perform the signal generation operation BY11 using the output terminal 338P to transmit the functional signal SG11 to the functional unit 335.
  • the function unit 335 responds to the function signal SG11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter application range RD1EL to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the control code CC1T, the control code CC13, the control code CC15, the control code CC1L, and the control code CC22 are respectively multiple handles.
  • the storage space SS11 further has a memory location PF2T.
  • the storage unit 250 stores the preset power usage target identifier HZ2T in the memory location PF2T.
  • the memory location PF2T is identified by a memory address FF2T, or is identified based on the memory address FF2T.
  • the memory address FF2T is defaulted.
  • the power usage target 285 is coupled to the memory location PF2T through the processing unit 230.
  • the operation request signal SZ21 conveys an input data DJ21.
  • the storage space SS11 includes the memory space SA1.
  • the data acquisition AD2C is one of a data acquisition operation AD25 and a data acquisition operation AD26.
  • the data acquisition operation AD25 accesses the power usage target identifier HZ2T stored in the memory location PF2T by using the default memory address FF2T to obtain the preset power usage target identifier HZ2T.
  • the data acquisition operation AD26 processes the input data DJ21 based on a default data derivation rule YU21 to obtain the preset power usage target identifier HZ2T.
  • the input unit 270 under the condition that the input unit 270 receives a user input operation JU22 for selecting the power usage target 286, a trigger event occurs, the input unit 270 responds to the user input operation JU22.
  • An operation request signal SZ22 is generated, and the operation request signal SZ22 is provided to the processing unit 230, thereby causing the processing unit 230 to receive the operation request signal SZ22.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains a measurement value VN21 and the power usage target identifier HZ22 in response to the operation request signal SZ22, and obtains the functional unit identifier HA22 based on the obtained power usage target identifier HZ22 .
  • the processing unit 230 causes one of the output component 450 and the output component 455 to transmit a message to the communication interface unit 386 based on the obtained measurement value VN21 and the obtained functional unit identifier HA22.
  • Control signal SC27 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU2A and convey the functional unit identifier HA22.
  • the control signal SC27 is the first control signal SC11.
  • the processing unit 331 responds to the first control signal SC11 to obtain the functional unit identifier HA22 from the first control signal SC11 .
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SZ22 to provide a control signal SV12 to the control terminal 263C.
  • the control signal SV12 is a selection control signal, which functions as an instruction to the input terminal 2632, and is different from the control signal SV11.
  • the multiplexer 263 responds to the control signal SV12 to cause the second functional relationship between the input terminal 2632 and the output terminal 263P to be equal to the second conduction relationship.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU2A to generate a sensing signal SN21.
  • the processing unit 230 receives the sensing signal SN21 from the sensing unit 334, and obtains the measurement in the specified measurement value format HH11 based on the received sensing signal SN21 Value VN21.
  • the operating unit 397 obtains the functional unit identifier HA22 from the control signal SC27 in response to the control signal SC27, and executes a signal generation using the output terminal 338 based on the obtained functional unit identifier HA22 Operate BY27 to transmit a function signal SG27 to the function unit 735.
  • the function signal SG27 is used to control the variable physical parameter QU2A.
  • the function signal SG27 is one of an operation signal, a control signal, a pulse width modulation signal, a level signal, and a driving signal.
  • the control signal SC27 transmits the functional unit identifier HA22 configured to indicate the output terminal 338Q to cause the processing unit 331 to select the functional unit 735 for control.
  • the user input operation JU11 is one of the user input operation JU21 and the user input operation JU22.
  • the trigger event EQ11 is a user input event for the input component 440 to receive the user input operation JU22 for selecting the power usage target 286.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the user input operation JU21 to enable the output component 450 and the output One of the components 455 transmits the control signal SC11 to the communication interface unit 386.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the user input operation JU22 to enable the output component 450 and the output One of the components 455 transmits the control signal SC27 to the communication interface unit 386.
  • the user interface area AP21 has the power usage target 285 and the power usage target 286.
  • the user input operation JU21 is executed by the user 295.
  • the power usage target 285 is one of a third sensing target and a third display target.
  • the input component 440 includes the electricity usage target 285.
  • the display component 460 includes the power usage target 285.
  • the third sensing target is a third button target.
  • the third display target is a third icon target.
  • the power usage target 286 is one of a fourth sensing target and a fourth display target. Under the condition that the electricity usage target 286 is the fourth sensing target, the input component 440 includes the electricity usage target 286. Under the condition that the power usage target 286 is the fourth display target, the display component 460 includes the power usage target 286. For example, the fourth sensing target is a fourth button target. The third display target is a fourth icon target.
  • the operating unit 297 includes a pointing device 441.
  • the input component 440 includes the pointing device 441.
  • the input component 440 is the pointing device 441.
  • the power usage target 285 receives the user input operation JU21 to cause the input component 440 to generate the operation request signal SZ21. , Provide the operation request signal SZ21 to the processing unit 230, and thereby enable the processing unit 230 to receive the operation request signal SZ21.
  • the pointing device 441 receives the user input operation JU21 for selecting the power usage target 285 to cause the pointing device 441
  • the operation request signal SZ21 is generated, and the operation request signal SZ21 is provided to the processing unit 230, thereby enabling the processing unit 230 to receive the operation request signal SZ21.
  • the user input operation JU21 is configured to rely on the pointing device 441 and the selection tool YJ11 to select the power usage target 285.
  • the selection tool YJ11 is a cursor.
  • the trigger application unit 281 generates the operation request signal SX11 in response to the trigger event EQ11, provides the operation request signal SX11 to the processing unit 230, and thereby causes the processing unit 230 to The operation request signal SX11 is received.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the control data code CK1T in response to the operation request signal SX11, and based on the obtained control data code CK1T, causes one of the output component 450 and the output component 455 to be sent to the
  • the communication interface unit 386 transmits the first control signal SC11.
  • the trigger application unit 281 is the state change detector 475, the reader 220, the input unit 270, the touch screen 2701, the input component 440, the input component 442, the One of the receiving component 446, the pointing device 441, the output unit 240, the display component 460, the sensing unit 260, and the timer 546.
  • the trigger event EQ11 is one of a trigger action event, a user input event, a signal input event, a state change event, an identification medium occurrence event, and an integer overflow event. Under the condition that the trigger event EQ11 is the integer overflow event, it is the timer 546 of the trigger application unit 281 that controls GE11 in response to a time related to the processing unit 230 and causes the integer overflow The incident happened.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to execute the time control GE11 for controlling the timer 546.
  • the timer 546 generates the integer overflow event in response to the time control GE11.
  • the time length range limit value pair LN1A is further stored in the storage space SS11 based on the default functional unit identifier HA2T.
  • the processing unit 230 further uses the storage unit 250 based on the obtained functional unit identifier HA2T to access the preset rated range limit value pair DD1A, the variable physical parameter range code UN1A, Any one of the relative value VK11, the relative value VK12, the operation reference data XU21, and the time length range limit value pair LN1A.
  • the preset application range limit value pair DN1L, the default control data code CK1T, the default target range limit value pair DN1T, the preset candidate range limit value pair DN1B and the default The control data code CK12 of is further stored in the memory space SA1 based on the default functional unit identifier HA2T.
  • the processing unit 230 further uses the memory unit 25Y1 based on the obtained functional unit identifier HA2T to access the preset application range limit value pair DN1L, the default control data code CK1T, Any one of the default target range limit value pair DN1T, the preset candidate range limit value pair DN1B, and the default control data code CK12.
  • the first memory address FN1L is based on the default functional unit identifier HA2T, the preset measurement value application range code EM1L, and the preset measurement range limit data code type identifier HN11. Is preset.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the functional unit identifier HA2T in response to the trigger event EQ11.
  • the first data acquisition operation AD11 is based on the obtained functional unit identifier HA2T, the determined measurement value application range code EM1L, and the obtained measurement range limit data code type identifier HN11 to obtain the The first memory address FN1L, and based on the obtained first memory address FN1L, the memory unit 25Y1 is used to access the preset pair of application range limit values stored in the first memory location PN1L DN1L.
  • the second memory address FX1L is preset based on the default functional unit identifier HA2T, the preset measurement value application range code EM1L, and the default control data code type identifier HK11. .
  • the processing unit 230 determines the current physical parameter application range RD1EL of the variable physical parameter QU1A, the processing unit 230 is based on the obtained functional unit identifier HA2T and the determined
  • the measurement value application range code EM1L and the obtained control data code type identifier HK11 are used to obtain the second memory address FX1L, and based on the obtained second memory address FX1L, the memory unit 25Y1 is used to connect Input the control data code CK1T stored in the second memory location PX1L.
  • FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8047 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8048 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • each of the implementation structure 8047 and the implementation structure 8048 includes the control device 210, the control target device 330, and the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is linked to the server 280.
  • the control device 210 is configured to control the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the control target device 330 by relying on the trigger event EQ11, and includes the operation unit 297 and the storage unit 250.
  • the operating unit 297 includes the processing unit 230 and a communication interface unit 246 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • control device 210 is identified by a control device identifier HAOT.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280, the storage unit 250, and the communication interface unit 246.
  • the communication interface unit 246 is coupled to the control target device 330.
  • the communication interface unit 246 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and includes the output component 450 and a receiving component 446 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the output component 450 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and is a transmission component.
  • the receiving component 446 is controlled by the processing unit 230 and is an input component.
  • the control target device 330 includes the operating unit 397, the sensing unit 334, a storage unit 332, and the functional unit 335.
  • the functional unit 335 is identified by the functional unit identifier HA2T.
  • the operating unit 397 includes the processing unit 331, the output unit 338, an input unit 377 coupled to the processing unit 331, and a communication interface unit 386 coupled to the processing unit 331.
  • the storage unit 332 is coupled to the processing unit 331.
  • the input unit 377 includes the input component 3372 and the input component 3374.
  • the communication interface unit 386 includes the input component 3371 and an output component 3861.
  • the sensing unit 334, the storage unit 332, the functional unit 335, the output unit 338, the input component 3372, the input component 3374, and the input component 3371 are all controlled by the processing unit 331 .
  • the input component 3371 is a receiver, and receives the electrical signal SP11 from the control device 210 under the condition that the first control signal SC11 is the electrical signal SP11.
  • the output component 3861 is a transmitter and is used to transmit at least one of the first sensing signal SN11 and the second sensing signal SN12.
  • the first control signal SC11 conveys the control code CC1T and the functional unit identifier HA2T.
  • the processing unit 331 obtains the control code CC1T and the functional unit identifier HA2T from the first control signal SC11 in response to the first control signal SC11, and based on the obtained control code CC1T and the obtained
  • the functional unit identifier HA2T is used to execute the signal generation control GY11 for controlling the output unit 338.
  • the output unit 338 performs the signal generation operation BY11 in response to the signal generation control GY11 to transmit the function signal SG11 to the function unit 335.
  • the functional unit 335 includes the supporting part 335K and the physical parameter forming part 3351 coupled to the supporting part 335K.
  • the output unit 338 includes an output terminal 338P, and the output terminal 338P is coupled to the functional unit 335.
  • the default functional unit identifier HA2T is configured to indicate the output terminal 338P.
  • the signal generation control GY11 plays a role of instructing the output terminal 338P, and is used to cause the processing unit 331 to provide a control signal SF11 to the output unit 338.
  • the control signal SF11 functions to indicate the output terminal 338P.
  • the output unit 338 responds to one of the signal generation control GY11 and the control signal SF11 to perform the signal generation operation BY11 using the output terminal 338P to transmit the function signal SG11 to the function unit 335.
  • the control target device 330 further includes the support portion 330K.
  • the supporting part 330K includes the supporting part 335K and is coupled to the operating unit 397, the sensing unit 334 and the functional unit 335.
  • the sensing unit 334 is coupled to the functional unit 335.
  • the sensing unit 334 is coupled to one of the supporting portion 330K and the supporting portion 335K.
  • the processing unit 230 is coupled to the network 410 through the communication interface unit 246. Therefore, the processing unit 230 is coupled to the server 280 through the communication interface unit 246 and the network 410.
  • the sensing unit 334 is configured to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A existing in the functional unit 335.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to cause the output component 450 to transmit an operation request signal SJ11 to the input component 3371.
  • the operation request signal SJ11 is a sensing request signal.
  • the operation request signal SJ11 conveys the control device identifier HA0T and the functional unit identifier HA2T.
  • the input component 3371 receives the operation request signal SJ11 from the output component 450.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the processing unit 331 obtains the control device identifier HA0T and the functional unit identifier HA2T from the operation request signal SJ11, and causes the control device identifier HA0T and the functional unit identifier HA2T to be obtained based on the obtained functional unit identifier HA2T.
  • the output component 3861 receives the first sensing signal SN11 from the sensing unit 334, and based on the obtained control device identifier HAOT, causes the output component 3861 to transmit to the receiving component 446 including An operation response signal SE21 of the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the processing unit 230 causes the sensing unit 334 to sense the variable physical parameter QU1A based on the obtained functional unit identifier HA2T to generate the first sensing signal SN11, and receive the first sensing signal SN11.
  • a sensing signal SN11, and based on the obtained functional unit identifier HA2T, the first sensing signal SN11 is provided to the output component 3861.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SJ11 by causing the output component 450 to transmit the operation response signal SE21.
  • the receiving component 446 receives the first sensing signal SN11 from the output component 3861.
  • the receiving component 446 receives the operation response signal SE21 including the first sensing signal SN11 from the output component 3861, and responds to the operation response signal SE21 to provide the first sensing signal SN11 to The processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the first sensing signal SN11 provided by the receiving component 446 to obtain the first measurement value in the specified measurement value format HH11 VN11.
  • the operating unit 297 includes the timer 539 coupled to the processing unit 230. The timer 539 is controlled by the processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the trigger event EQ11 to execute a time control GF11 related to a specified time TD01.
  • the processing unit 230 is based on the provided information within the specified time TD01.
  • the first sensing signal SN11 is used to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the time control GF11 is used to control the timer 539.
  • the processing unit 230 prohibits execution of the method for checking the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement The checking operation BV11 of the first mathematical relationship KV11 between the value application range RN1L.
  • the designated time TD01 has an end time point.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the specific condition in response to the end time point through the timer 539, the processing unit 230 prohibits the execution of the checking operation BV11.
  • the processing unit 230 uses The signal generation control GS11 is executed to cause the output component 450 to generate the first control signal SC11.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the second Sensing signal SN12.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the signal generation control GS11 to cause the output component 450 to transmit an operation request signal SJ12 to the input component 3371.
  • the operation request signal SJ12 is a sensing request signal.
  • the processing unit 230 causes the output component 450 to transmit the operation request signal SJ12 to the input component 3371 within a specified time TG11 after the operation time TD11.
  • the operation request signal SJ12 conveys the control device identifier HA0T and the functional unit identifier HA2T.
  • the input component 3371 receives the operation request signal SJ12 from the output component 450.
  • the processing unit 331 obtains the control device identifier HA0T and the functional unit identifier HA2T from the operation request signal SJ12, and causes the control device identifier HA0T and the functional unit identifier HA2T to be obtained based on the obtained functional unit identifier HA2T.
  • the output component 3861 receives the second sensing signal SN12 from the sensing unit 334, and based on the obtained control device identifier HAOT, causes the output component 3861 to transmit to the receiving component 446 containing all the signals.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the sensing request signal SJ12 by causing the output component 450 to transmit the operation response signal SE22.
  • the receiving component 446 receives the second sensing signal SN12 from the output component 3861.
  • the receiving component 446 receives the operation response signal SE22 including the second sensing signal SN12 from the output component 3861, and responds to the operation response signal SE22 to provide the second sensing signal SN12 to The processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the data provided by the receiving component 446
  • the second sensing signal SN12 is used to obtain the second measurement value VN12 in the designated measurement value format HH11.
  • the specified time TG12 is after the specified time TG11.
  • the first control signal SC11 is a physical parameter control signal.
  • the operation request signal SJ11 is a physical parameter sensing request signal.
  • the processing unit 230 enables the communication interface unit 246 to transmit the first control signal SC11 and the second control signal SC11 and the second control signal to the communication interface unit 386 via the actual link LK1A, either by wire or wirelessly. Any one of the signal SC12, the third control signal SC22, the control signal SC15, the control signal SC27, the operation request signal SJ11, and the operation request signal SJ12.
  • the processing unit 331 causes the communication interface unit 386 to wire or wirelessly transmit the control response signal SE11, the operation response signal SE21, and the operation response signal to the communication interface unit 246 through the actual link LK2A Any signal of SE22.
  • the communication interface unit 246 and the communication interface unit 386 communicate by wire or wirelessly.
  • the processing unit 230 causes the communication interface unit 246 to transmit the communication interface unit 386 to the communication interface unit 386 through one of the wireless link LK11 and the wireless network. Any of the first control signal SC11, the second control signal SC12, the third control signal SC22, the control signal SC15, the control signal SC27, the operation request signal SJ11, and the operation request signal SJ12 One signal.
  • the processing unit 331 causes the communication interface unit 386 to wire to the communication interface unit 246 via one of the wireless link LK21 and the wireless network. Or wirelessly transmit any one of the control response signal SE11, the operation response signal SE21, and the operation response signal SE22.
  • the signal SC27, the operation request signal SJ11, the operation request signal SJ12, the control response signal SE11, the operation response signal SE21, and the operation response signal SE22 are each a plurality of optical signals.
  • FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8049 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8049 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 has a variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L and a physical parameter target range RD1ET different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the control device 210 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A includes a sensing unit 334 and an operating unit 297.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN11.
  • the operating unit 297 is coupled to the sensing unit 334 and includes a touch screen 2701.
  • the touch screen 2701 includes a button target WP11.
  • the operating unit 297 responds to the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain a first measurement value VN11; for example, the trigger event EQ11 is when the operating unit 297 receives and uses the A user input operation JU11 of the button target WP11.
  • the operating unit 297 determines the physical parameter application that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking a first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L Under the condition of the range RD1EL, the operating unit 297 transmits to the control target device 330 a first control signal SC11 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET. For example, the operation unit 297 generates an operation request signal SX11 in response to the user input operation JU11, and uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the operation request signal SX11. .
  • the operating unit 297 includes a processing unit 230, a transmission component 450, and the touch screen 2701.
  • the touch screen 2701 and the transmission component 450 are both coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the touch screen 2701 receives the user input operation JU11, and responds to the user input operation JU11 to provide the operation request signal SX11 to the processing unit 230, thereby enabling the processing unit 230 to receive all the operations.
  • the electrical application target WJ11 is the button target WP11 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L has an application range limit value pair DN1L.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the operation request signal SX11.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the application range limit value pair DN1L in response to the operation request signal SX11, and checks the application range limit value pair DN1L by comparing the first measurement value VN11 with the obtained application range limit value pair DN1L
  • the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11, the processing unit 230 enables the transmission component 450
  • the first control signal SC11 is transmitted to the control target device 330.
  • the first control signal SC11 is used by the control target device 330 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8050 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8050 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 has a variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L and a physical parameter target range RD1ET different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the control device 210 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A is one of a mobile device and a remote controller, and includes a processing unit 230 and a communication interface unit 246.
  • the communication interface unit 246 is coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to enable the communication interface unit 246 to transmit an operation request signal SJ11 to the control target device 330. For example, under the condition that the control target device 330 receives the operation request signal SJ11, the control target device 330 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN11. The communication interface unit 246 receives an operation response signal SE21 including the first sensing signal SN11 from the control target device 330.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains a first measurement value VN11 in response to the received first sensing signal SN11.
  • the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter application that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking a first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L Under the condition of the range RD1EL, the processing unit 230 causes the communication interface unit 246 to transmit a first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330.
  • the first control signal SC11 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the processing unit 230 is configured to control the communication interface unit 246.
  • the control target device 330 includes a processing unit 331, a sensing unit 334, a communication interface unit 386, and a functional unit 335 having the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the sensing unit 334, the communication interface unit 386 and the functional unit 335 are all coupled to the processing unit 331.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to a trigger event EQ11 to cause the communication interface unit 246 to transmit the operation request signal SJ11 to the communication interface unit 386.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the processing unit 331 receives the first sensing signal SN11 from the sensing unit 334 within an operation time TX21.
  • the processing unit 331 responds to the operation request signal SJ11 within the operation time TX21 to cause the communication interface unit 386 to transmit to the communication interface unit 246 based on the received first sensing signal SN11.
  • the operation of the first sensing signal SN11 responds to the signal SE21.
  • the control device 210 further includes a display component 460 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 causes the display component 460 to display measurement information LY11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A based on the obtained first measurement value VN11.
  • the processing unit 230 uses a designated measurement value format HH11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11.
  • the processing unit 230 executes a signal generation control GS11 within an operating time TD11 based on the first sensing signal SN11 to cause the communication interface unit 246 to transmit the first control signal to the communication interface unit 386 SC11.
  • the processing unit 331 controls the functional unit 335 in response to the first control signal SC11 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the signal generation control GS11 to cause the communication interface unit 246 to transmit an operation request signal SJ12 to the communication interface unit 386.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a second sensing signal SN12.
  • the processing unit 331 receives the second sensing from the sensing unit 334 within an operation time TX22 after the operation time TD11 Measure the signal SN12.
  • the processing unit 331 responds to the operation request signal SJ12 within the operation time TX22 to cause the communication interface unit 386 to transmit the communication interface unit 386 to the communication interface unit 246 based on the received second sensing signal SN12.
  • An operation of the second sensing signal SN12 responds to the signal SE22.
  • the processing unit 230 Under the condition that the communication interface unit 246 receives the second sensing signal SN12 from the control device 210 within a specified time TG12 after the operating time TD11, the processing unit 230 responds to the second The sensing signal SN12 is used to obtain a second measurement value VN12 in the specified measurement value format HH11.
  • the processing unit 230 causes the display component 460 to display measurement information LY12 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A based on the obtained second measurement value VN12.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET is represented by a measured value target range RN1T.
  • the processing unit 230 performs a verification operation ZU11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A based on the obtained second measurement value VN12 within the specified time TG12 after the operation time TD11.
  • the verification operation ZU11 includes a check operation BV22 for checking a third mathematical relationship KV22 between the obtained second measurement value VN12 and the measurement value target range RN1T.
  • the control device 210 further includes a storage unit 250 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to one of the first sensing signal SN11 and the operation response signal SE21 to determine a physical parameter target range code UN1T representing the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the storage unit 250 stores a variable physical parameter range code UN1A. Under the condition of a specific situation in which the processing unit 230 determines the physical parameter target range RD1ET into which the variable physical parameter QU1A enters based on the verification operation ZU11, the processing unit 230 performs a data storage control Operate GU11 to use the storage unit 250 to assign the determined physical parameter target range code UN1T to the variable physical parameter range code UN1A.
  • the processing unit 331 causes the communication interface unit 246 to transmit the operation request signal SJ11, Either the control signal SC81 and the operation request signal SJ12.
  • the processing unit 331 causes the communication interface unit 386 to transmit the operation response signal SE21 and the communication interface unit 246 to the communication interface unit 246 via a wireless link LK21 Operate any signal in response to signal SE22.
  • the control device 212 is the remote controller, the operation request signal SJ11, the control signal SC81, the operation request signal SJ12, the operation response signal SE21, and the operation response signal SE22 These are multiple optical signals.
  • FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8051 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8051 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 has a variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is based on a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L, a physical parameter target range RD1ET different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL, and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter target
  • the range RD1ET is characterized by a specific physical parameter range RD2E2.
  • the control device 210 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A includes a sensing unit 334 and an operating unit 297.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN11.
  • the operating unit 297 is coupled to the sensing unit 334 and includes a timer 539. Under the condition that a trigger event EQ11 occurs, the operating unit 297 obtains a first measurement value VN11 in response to the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the operating unit 297 determines the physical parameter application that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking a first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L Under the condition of the range RD1EL, the operating unit 297 transmits a first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330.
  • the first control signal SC11 is used by the control target device 330 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the operating unit 297 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11, the operating unit 297 The timer 539 is caused to perform a counting operation BC1T to reach a specific time TJ1T, and a second control signal SC22 is generated within the specific time TJ1T.
  • the second control signal SC22 is used by the control target device 330 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the specific physical parameter range RD2E2.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is related to a variable time length LF1A.
  • the variable time length LF1A is characterized based on a reference time length LJ1T.
  • the timer 539 is configured to comply with a timer specification FW11.
  • the reference time length LJ1T is represented by a measured time length value CL1T.
  • the measurement time length value CL1T is preset based on the timer specification FW11.
  • the operating unit 297 determines the physical parameter application range RD1EL that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking the first mathematical relationship KV11, the operating unit 297 obtains the measurement time length Value CL1T, and based on the obtained measurement time length value CL1T, the timer 539 is caused to perform the counting operation BC1T to reach the specific time TJ1T.
  • the operating unit 297 further includes a processing unit 230 and a transmission component 450.
  • the sensing unit 334, the timer 539 and the transmission component 450 are all coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the processing unit 230 causes the timer 539 to perform the counting operation BC1T, and causes the transmission component 450 to transmit any of the first control signal SC11 and the second control signal SC22 to the control target device 330.
  • One signal For example, the specific physical parameter range RD2E2 is the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • FIG. 43 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8052 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8052 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 has a variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L and a physical parameter target range RD1ET different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the control device 210 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A includes a sensing unit 334 and an operating unit 297.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN11.
  • the operating unit 297 is coupled to the sensing unit 334 and includes a reader 220 for identifying the identification medium 310 by using the reader 220. Under the condition that an identification medium occurrence event EQ1P related to the identification medium 310 occurs, the operating unit 297 obtains a first measurement value VN11 in response to the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the operating unit 297 determines the physical parameter application that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking a first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L Under the condition of the range RD1EL, the operating unit 297 transmits to the control target device 330 a first control signal SC11 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the control target device 330 is disposed in one of the inside of the control device 210 and the outside of the control device 210. Under the condition that the control target device 330 is located inside the control device 210, the control device 210 includes the control target device 330.
  • the identification medium occurrence event EQ1P is a trigger event EQ11.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L has an application range limit value pair DN1L.
  • the operation unit 297 generates an operation request signal SX11 in response to the identification medium occurrence event EQ1P, and uses the first sensing signal SN11 in response to the operation request signal SX11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 .
  • the identification medium 310 records the application range limit value pair DN1L.
  • the operating unit 297 reads the recorded application range limit value pair DN1L from the recognition medium 310 in response to the identification medium occurrence event EQ1P to obtain the application range limit value pair DN1L, and compares the The first measurement value VN11 and the read application range limit value pair DN1L are used to check the first mathematical relationship KV11.
  • the operating unit 297 further includes a processing unit 230 and a transmission component 450.
  • the sensing unit 334, the reader 220 and the transmission component 450 are all coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the reader 220 transmits the operation request signal SX11 to the processing unit 230 in response to the identification medium occurrence event EQ1P.
  • the processing unit 230 uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the operation request signal SX11, and obtains the first measurement value VN11 through the reader 220 in response to the operation request signal SX11.
  • the application range limit value pair DN1L is recorded, and the transmission component 450 transmits the first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330 based on a check operation BV11 for checking the first mathematical relationship KV11 .
  • FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8052 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8052 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 has a variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L and a physical parameter target range RD1ET different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the control device 210 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A includes a limit switch 485, a sensing unit 334, and an operating unit 297.
  • the control target device 330 causes the limit switch 485 to generate a trigger signal SX1A by executing a specific function operation ZH11 related to the variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN11.
  • the operating unit 297 is coupled to the sensing unit 334 and the limit switch 485, and uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain a first measurement value VN11 in response to the trigger signal SX11.
  • the operating unit 297 determines the physical parameter application that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking a first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L Under the condition of the range RD1EL, the operating unit 297 transmits to the control target device 330 a first control signal SC11 for causing the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the measurement value application range RN1L has an application range limit value pair DN1L.
  • the specific function operation ZH11 is a spatial movement operation.
  • the operating unit 297 receives the trigger signal SX1A, obtains the application range limit value pair DN1L in response to the trigger signal SX1A, and compares the first measurement value VN11 with the obtained application range limit value Check the first mathematical relationship KV11 for DN1L.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is a variable electrical parameter.
  • the control target device 330 receives a control signal SC10 from the control device 210 and executes the specific function operation ZH11 in response to the control signal SC10.
  • the limit switch 485 is coupled to the control target device 330 and is a state change detector 475.
  • the operating unit 297 includes a processing unit 230, a trigger application unit 281, and a transmission component 450.
  • the sensing unit 334, the trigger application unit 281, the limit switch 485 and the transmission component 450 are all coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the trigger application unit 281 generates an operation request signal SX10 in response to a trigger event EQ10, provides the operation request signal SX10 to the processing unit 230, and thereby causes the processing unit 230 to receive the operation request signal SX10.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SX10 to cause the transmission component 450 to transmit the control signal SC10 to the control target device 330.
  • FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8054 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8054 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 has a variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is characterized based on a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L and a physical parameter target range RD1ET different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL.
  • the control device 210 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A includes a sensing unit 334 and an operating unit 297.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN11.
  • the operating unit 297 is coupled to the sensing unit 334. Under the condition that a trigger event EQ11 occurs, the operating unit 297 obtains a first measurement value VN11 in response to the first sensing signal SN11.
  • the operating unit 297 determines the physical parameter application that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking a first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L Under the condition of the range RD1EL, the operating unit 297 transmits a first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330.
  • the control device 210 is one of a mobile device and a remote controller. Under the condition that the control device 210 is the mobile device, the operation unit 297 transmits the first control signal SC11 or the first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330 via a wireless link LK11 It is a radio signal. Under the condition that the control device 210 is the remote controller, the first control signal SC11 is an optical signal SQ11. The first control signal SC11 is used by the control target device 330 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the optical signal SQ11 is an infrared signal.
  • the mobile device transmits the first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330 in a moving state.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is further characterized based on a second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 that is different from the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 is represented by a specific physical parameter range code UN15.
  • the operating unit 297 includes a processing unit 230 and a communication interface unit 246 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the communication interface unit 246 includes a receiving component 446 coupled to the processing unit 230 and a transmission component 450 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the receiving component 446 receives from an external device 610 to indicate the second An operation request signal SJ31 for the role of two specific physical parameter ranges RD1E5.
  • the operation request signal SJ31 functions to indicate the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 by transmitting the specific physical parameter range code UN15.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the delivered specific physical parameter range code UN15 from the operation request signal SJ31, and based on the obtained specific physical parameter range code UN15, causes the transmission component 450 to send the transmission component 450 to the control target
  • the device 330 transmits a control signal SC15.
  • the control signal SC15 is used to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5.
  • the external device 610 is the same as or different from the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 includes an operating unit 397 and a functional unit 335 coupled to the operating unit 397.
  • the operating unit 397 includes a processing unit 331 and a receiver 3371.
  • the receiver 3371 and the functional unit 335 are both coupled to the processing unit 331.
  • the processing unit 230 causes the transmission component 450 to transmit the first control signal SC11 and the receiver 3371 to the receiver 3371 through the wireless link LK11. Any signal of the control signal SC15.
  • the processing unit 230 generates a function signal SG15 in response to the control signal SC15.
  • the function unit 335 receives the function signal SG15, and responds to the function signal SG15 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5.
  • FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8055 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8055 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 has a variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is based on a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L, a physical parameter target range RD1ET different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL, and a physical parameter target range different from the physical parameter target A second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 of the range RD1ET is characterized.
  • the control device 210 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A includes a sensing unit 334 and an operating unit 297.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN11.
  • the operating unit 297 is coupled to the sensing unit 334 and includes an electrical application target WJ11. Under the condition that a trigger event EQ11 occurs, the operating unit 297 responds to the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain a first measurement value VN11, and the trigger event EQ11 is when the operating unit 297 receives and uses the electrical application A user of the target WJ11 inputs and operates JU11.
  • the operating unit 297 determines the physical parameter application that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking a first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L Under the condition of the range RD1EL, the operating unit 297 transmits a first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330.
  • the first control signal SC11 is used by the control target device 330 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the operation unit 297 Under the condition that the variable physical parameter QU1A is configured to be in the physical parameter target range RD1ET based on the first control signal SC11, the operation unit 297 receives a user input operation JU12. The operation unit 297 generates an operation request signal SJ61 in response to the user input operation JU12, and transmits a control signal SC15 to the control target device 330 in response to the operation request signal SJ61. The control signal SC15 is used by the control target device 330 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5. For example, the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 is equal to one of the physical parameter application range RD1EL and the physical parameter candidate range RD1E2.
  • the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5 is represented by a specific physical parameter range code UN15.
  • the operating unit 297 includes a processing unit 230, the electrical application target WJ11 coupled to the processing unit 230, an electrical application target WJ12 coupled to the processing unit 230, and an electrical application target WJ12 coupled to the processing unit 230. Communication interface unit 246.
  • the electrical application target WJ12 is an electrical application unit, which is the same as or different from the electrical application target WJ11.
  • the operation unit 297 responds to the user input operation JU11 using the electrical application target WJ11 to cause the processing unit 230 to receive an operation request signal SX11, and responds to the operation request signal SX11 to check the first math Relationship KV11.
  • the processing unit 230 enables the communication interface unit 246 transmits the first control signal SC11 to the communication interface unit 386.
  • the electronic application target WJ12 is one of a button target and an icon target.
  • the operating unit 297 includes an input component 440 coupled to the processing unit 230 and a display component 460 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • one of the input component 440, the display component 460, and the touch screen 2701 includes the electrical application target WJ11.
  • One of the input component 440, the display component 460, and the touch screen 2701 includes the electrical application target WJ12.
  • the control signal SC15 is used by one of the control target device 330 and the processing unit 331 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5.
  • the user input operation JU12 is performed by a user 295.
  • the input component 440 provides the operation request signal SX11 to the processing unit 230 in response to the user input operation JU11 using the electrical application target WJ11.
  • the input component 440 receives the user input operation JU12 that occurs after the user input operation JU11, and responds to the user input operation JU12 using the electronic application target WJ12 to provide the operation request signals SJ61 to SJ61 to The processing unit 230, thereby enabling the processing unit 230 to receive the operation request signal SJ61.
  • one of the input component 440, the display component 460, and the touch screen 2701 includes the electrical application target WJ11 and the electrical application target WJ12.
  • the electrical application target WJ12 is the electrical application target WJ11. Under the condition that the electrical application target WJ12 is different from the electrical application target WJ11, the electrical application target WJ11 and the electrical application target WJ12 are located in different spatial positions.
  • the processing unit 230 determines a specific input code UW11 equal to the specific physical parameter range code UN15 in response to the operation request signal SJ61, and causes the communication interface unit 246 to communicate with the communication interface unit 246 based on the specific input code UW11
  • the interface unit 386 transmits a control signal SC15.
  • the control signal SC15 is used by the control target device 330 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the physical parameter target range RD1ET to enter the second specific physical parameter range RD1E5.
  • the electrical application target WJ12 and the user input operation JU12 are respectively equal to the button 4402 and the user input operation BQ11.
  • the input component 440 receives the use of the electrical application target WJ12 A user input operation JU1A generates an operation request signal SJ6A in response to the user input operation JU1A, and provides the operation request signal SJ6A to the processing unit 230.
  • the electrical application target WJ12 receives the user input operation JU1A so that the input component 440 receives the user input operation JU1A.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SJ6A to cause the communication interface unit 246 to transmit a control signal SC1A to the communication interface unit 386.
  • the control signal SC1A is used by one of the control target device 330 and the processing unit 331 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to leave the specific physical parameter range RD1E5 to enter the multiple different physical parameters.
  • the specific physical parameter range RD1EA is the same as the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram of an implementation structure 8056 of the control system 801 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the implementation structure 8056 includes the control device 210 and the control target device 330.
  • the control target device 330 has a variable physical parameter QU1A.
  • the variable physical parameter QU1A is based on a physical parameter application range RD1EL represented by a measurement value application range RN1L, a physical parameter target range RD1ET different from the physical parameter application range RD1EL, and a physical parameter target range RD1EU. Be characterized.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL, the physical parameter target range RD1ET, and the physical parameter target range RD1EU are different.
  • the physical parameter application range RD1EL has a default physical parameter application range limit ZD1L1 and a default physical parameter application range limit ZD1L2 relative to the default physical parameter application range limit ZD1L1.
  • the control device 210 for controlling the variable physical parameter QU1A includes a sensing unit 334 and an operating unit 297.
  • the sensing unit 334 senses the variable physical parameter QU1A to generate a first sensing signal SN11.
  • the operating unit 297 is coupled to the sensing unit 334 and includes an electricity usage target 275 and an electricity usage target 276. Under the condition that a trigger event EQ11 occurs, the operating unit 297 responds to the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain a first measurement value VN11, and the trigger event EQ11 is when the operating unit 297 receives and uses the A user of one of the power usage target 275 and the power usage target 276 inputs and operates JU11.
  • the operating unit 297 determines the physical parameter application that the variable physical parameter QU1A is currently in by checking a first mathematical relationship KV11 between the first measurement value VN11 and the measurement value application range RN1L Under the condition of the range RD1EL, the operating unit 297 transmits a first control signal SC11 to the control target device 330.
  • the electricity usage target 275 is located at a spatial position LD91.
  • the electricity use target 276 is located at a spatial position LD92 that is different from the spatial position LD91.
  • the first control signal SC11 is used by the control target device 330 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to change from the physical parameter application range RD1EL passes the default physical parameter application range limit ZD1L1 to enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET is adjacent to the default physical parameter application range limit ZD1L1.
  • the first control signal SC11 is used by the control target device 330 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to change from the physical parameter application range RD1EL passes the default physical parameter application range limit ZD1L2 to enter the physical parameter target range RD1EU.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1EU is adjacent to the default physical parameter application range limit ZD1L2.
  • the operation unit 297 generates an operation request signal SX11 in response to the user input operation JU11, and uses the first sensing signal SN11 to obtain the first measurement value VN11 in response to the operation request signal SX11. .
  • the operating unit 297 includes a user interface area AP21.
  • the user interface area AP21 has the power usage target 275 and the power usage target 276.
  • the operating unit 297 includes a processing unit 230, an input component 440, a display component 460, and a transmission component 450.
  • the power usage target 275 and the power usage target 276 are both coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the input component 440, the display component 460 and the transmission component 450 are all coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • One of the input component 440 and the display component 460 includes the user interface area AP21.
  • the input component 440 receives the user input operation JU11.
  • the input component 440 Under the condition that the user input operation JU11 uses the power usage target 275, the input component 440 generates an operation request signal SM27 in response to the user input operation JU11, and provides the operation request signal SM27 to the The processing unit 230 and thereby enable the processing unit 230 to receive the operation request signal SM27.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains a control data code CJ1T related to the physical parameter target range RD1ET, and based on the control data code CJ1T, causes the transmission component 450 to send a message to the receiving component.
  • 3371 transmits the first control signal SC11 equal to a control signal SC37.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1ET has a designated physical parameter QD1T.
  • the control data code CJ1T is preset based on the designated physical parameter QD1T.
  • the input component 440 Under the condition that the user input operation JU11 uses the power usage target 276, the input component 440 generates an operation request signal SM28 in response to the user input operation JU11, and provides the operation request signal SM28 to the The processing unit 230, thereby enabling the processing unit 230 to receive the operation request signal SM28.
  • the processing unit 230 responds to the operation request signal SM28 to obtain a control data code CJ1U related to the physical parameter target range RD1EU, and based on the control data code CJ1U, causes the transmission component 450 to send the control target
  • the device 330 transmits the first control signal SC11 equal to a control signal SC38.
  • the physical parameter target range RD1EU has a designated physical parameter QD1U.
  • the control data code CJ1U is preset based on the designated physical parameter QD1U.
  • the operation request signal SX11 is equal to one of the operation request signal SM27 and the operation request signal SM28.
  • the control signal SC37 is used by one of the control target device 330 and the processing unit 331 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to pass from the physical parameter application range RD1EL through the default physical parameter application range limit ZD1L1 To enter the physical parameter target range RD1ET.
  • the control signal SC38 is different from the control signal SC37, and is used by one of the control target device 330 and the processing unit 331 to cause the variable physical parameter QU1A to pass through the physical parameter application range RD1EL
  • the default physical parameter application range limit ZD1L2 is used to enter the physical parameter target range RD1EU.
  • control device 210 further includes a storage unit 250 coupled to the processing unit 230.
  • the storage unit 250 includes a storage space SS11, and stores the control data code CJ1T and the control data code CJ1U in the storage space SS11.
  • the power usage target 275 has a power usage target identifier HZ11.
  • the electricity usage target 276 is identified by an electricity usage target identifier HZ12.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the power use target identifier HZ11 in response to the operation request signal SM27, and accesses the stored control data code CJ1T based on the obtained power use target identifier HZ11 to access the stored control data code CJ1T from The storage space SS11 obtains the control data code CJ1T.
  • the processing unit 230 obtains the power use target identifier HZ12 in response to the operation request signal SM28, and accesses the stored control data code CJ1U based on the obtained power use target identifier HZ12 to access the stored control data code CJ1U from The storage space SS11 obtains the control data code CJ1U.
  • AD1A, AD2A, AD2B, AD2C data acquisition
  • AD21, AD22, AD23, AD24, AD25, AD26 data acquisition operation
  • AP11, AP21 user interface area
  • BV11, BV15, BV21, ZP11, ZP12 check operation
  • CD11 The first data comparison
  • CD21 The second data comparison
  • CE11, CE1T, CP11, CP12 data comparison
  • EQ1P Recognizing media occurrence events
  • GC1H2, GC1HT Time candidate interval representation
  • GD1ET, RD1ET, RD1EU target range of physical parameters
  • GD1E2, RD1E7, RD2E2 physical parameter candidate range
  • GJ11 Reference range of measurement time length value
  • GW1R sensor measurement range indication
  • HA1T, HA12 control target device identifier
  • HA2T, HA22 functional unit identifier
  • HN11 Measuring range limit data code type identifier
  • HP1E1 Time reference interval
  • HP1E2 Time reference interval, time candidate interval
  • HZ11, HZ12, HZ2T, HZ22 Electric use target identifier
  • LD91, LD92 spatial location
  • LF1A, LF2A variable time length
  • LT1T Application time length
  • ND1A Data Acquisition Program
  • PE11, PP11, PP12 logical decision
  • PN1L the first memory location
  • RD1E2 physical parameter reference range, first physical parameter candidate range
  • RD2E2 physical parameter candidate range, specific physical parameter range
  • RN1T target range of measured values
  • RX1L, RX1T Corresponding measurement value range
  • TK11, TK21 control data code type
  • TX11, TX12, TX21, TX22 operating time
  • UD12 physical parameter specified range code, physical parameter candidate range code
  • VA11, VK11, VK12 relative value
  • VN11 The first measured value
  • VN12 second measured value
  • WS12, WS1T write request information
  • ZD1L1, ZD1L2 Default physical parameter application range limit
  • ZD1T1, ZD1T2 Default physical parameter target range limit

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Automation & Control Theory (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Artificial Intelligence (AREA)
  • Computer Vision & Pattern Recognition (AREA)
  • Evolutionary Computation (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Software Systems (AREA)
  • Testing Or Calibration Of Command Recording Devices (AREA)
  • Feedback Control In General (AREA)

Abstract

L'invention concerne un appareil à cible de régulation (210) destiné à réguler un paramètre physique variable (QU1A), comprenant une unité de détection (334) et une unité de commande (297). Le paramètre physique variable (QU1A) est caractérisé sur la base d'une plage d'application de paramètre physique (RD1EL) représentée par une plage d'application de valeur de mesure (RN1L) et d'une plage cible de paramètre physique (RD1ET) différente de la plage d'application de paramètre physique (RD1EL). L'unité de détection (334) détecte le paramètre physique variable (QU1A) et génère un premier signal de détection (SN11). Lorsqu'un incident déclencheur (EQ10, EQ11, EQ21) se produit, l'unité de commande (297) répond au premier signal de détection (SN11) pour obtenir une première valeur de mesure (VN11) ; et, par vérification d'une première relation mathématique (KV11) entre la première valeur de mesure (VN11) et la plage d'application de valeur de mesure (RN1L) pour déterminer la plage d'application de paramètre physique (RD1EL) dans laquelle le paramètre physique variable (QU1A) se trouve actuellement, l'unité de commande délivre un premier signal de régulation (SC11) pour amener le paramètre physique variable (QU1A) à rentrer dans la plage cible de paramètre physique (RD1ET).
PCT/CN2020/140784 2019-12-31 2020-12-29 Appareil de régulation et procédé de régulation de paramètres physiques variables WO2021136260A1 (fr)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202080091307.0A CN114930257B (zh) 2019-12-31 2020-12-29 用于控制可变物理参数的控制装置及方法

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201911411837.4A CN113126487B (zh) 2019-12-31 2019-12-31 用于控制可变物理参数的控制装置及方法
CN201911411837.4 2019-12-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021136260A1 true WO2021136260A1 (fr) 2021-07-08

Family

ID=76686540

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/140784 WO2021136260A1 (fr) 2019-12-31 2020-12-29 Appareil de régulation et procédé de régulation de paramètres physiques variables

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (2) CN113126487B (fr)
WO (1) WO2021136260A1 (fr)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5576700A (en) * 1992-08-26 1996-11-19 Scientific-Atlanta Apparatus and method for controlling an electrical load and monitoring control operations and the electrical load
CN101141568A (zh) * 2006-09-08 2008-03-12 索尼株式会社 图像拾取设备和图像拾取方法
CN107851046A (zh) * 2015-07-31 2018-03-27 苹果公司 自动化环境中触发器执行的委托
CN108021240A (zh) * 2017-12-26 2018-05-11 欧姆(重庆)电子技术有限公司 操纵杆的控制系统和方法
CN109565178A (zh) * 2016-06-02 2019-04-02 开放能源有限公司 控制电力负载的系统和方法
CN110138717A (zh) * 2018-02-02 2019-08-16 钟国诚 用于传送电子数据的电子装置和方法

Family Cites Families (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4811312B2 (ja) * 2007-03-19 2011-11-09 パナソニック電工株式会社 熱線式ワイヤレス発信器及びワイヤレス受信器
CN102067733B (zh) * 2008-06-20 2014-06-11 松下电器产业株式会社 照明点灯设备、照明设备和照明系统
US9234770B2 (en) * 2010-04-19 2016-01-12 Qualcomm Incorporated Dynamic sensor range
US8502456B2 (en) * 2010-09-09 2013-08-06 Ipixc Llc Managing light system energy use
JP6110844B2 (ja) * 2011-04-19 2017-04-05 フィリップス ライティング ホールディング ビー ヴィ 照明変更／最適化システム
TWI457548B (zh) * 2011-12-16 2014-10-21 Au Optronics Corp 光感測裝置及其調整方法
JP2015528992A (ja) * 2012-07-24 2015-10-01 エンライテッド・インコーポレーテッド 分散型照明制御
KR101991029B1 (ko) * 2012-08-16 2019-06-19 엘지이노텍 주식회사 조명 제어 시스템
CN203748067U (zh) * 2014-02-18 2014-07-30 凯元商业有限公司 可侦测阅读环境及周遭环境作光源调控的led照明设备
CN107801279B (zh) * 2016-09-02 2022-06-07 陈家德 在线自由设定方法及具有其的led保防灯及其控制装置

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5576700A (en) * 1992-08-26 1996-11-19 Scientific-Atlanta Apparatus and method for controlling an electrical load and monitoring control operations and the electrical load
CN101141568A (zh) * 2006-09-08 2008-03-12 索尼株式会社 图像拾取设备和图像拾取方法
CN107851046A (zh) * 2015-07-31 2018-03-27 苹果公司 自动化环境中触发器执行的委托
CN109565178A (zh) * 2016-06-02 2019-04-02 开放能源有限公司 控制电力负载的系统和方法
CN108021240A (zh) * 2017-12-26 2018-05-11 欧姆(重庆)电子技术有限公司 操纵杆的控制系统和方法
CN110138717A (zh) * 2018-02-02 2019-08-16 钟国诚 用于传送电子数据的电子装置和方法

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114930257B (zh) 2024-04-26
CN113126487B (zh) 2023-04-18
CN113126487A (zh) 2021-07-16
CN114930257A (zh) 2022-08-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10102723B2 (en) Dynamic haptic generation based on detected video events
EP2490104B1 (fr) Procédé et terminal mobile pour contrôler une application dans le terminal mobile
CN109274309B (zh) 马达控制方法、装置、电子设备及存储介质
KR20180085931A (ko) 음성 입력 처리 방법 및 이를 지원하는 전자 장치
CN107005796B (zh) 用于确定是否执行电子设备的任务的移动终端和方法
KR101692004B1 (ko) 웨어러블 바이오 장치
KR20170093470A (ko) 스트레스 관리 서비스를 제공하기 위한 방법 및 그 전자 장치
WO2013165348A1 (fr) Signal de commande basé sur une commande tapée par un utilisateur
CN110412884A (zh) 家用电器控制方法、装置、电子设备及存储介质
CN109410950A (zh) 一种烹饪设备的语音控制方法及系统
EP4137896A1 (fr) Procédé et système de mise en service de capteurs environnementaux
WO2021136260A1 (fr) Appareil de régulation et procédé de régulation de paramètres physiques variables
TWI798812B (zh) 用於控制照明裝置的控制裝置及方法
TWI734335B (zh) 用於控制可變物理參數的控制裝置及方法
WO2021136374A1 (fr) Appareil cible de commande et procédé de commande de paramètres physiques variables
WO2021136253A1 (fr) Appareil fonctionnel et procédé de commande de paramètres physiques variables
TWI791391B (zh) 用於控制可變物理參數的控制裝置及系統及方法
TWI741471B (zh) 控制目標裝置及用於控制可變物理參數的方法
CN110362353A (zh) 外设控制方法、外设控制装置、存储介质与电子设备
TWI742502B (zh) 用於控制可變物理參數的控制裝置及方法
KR100847152B1 (ko) 로봇의 가이드 시스템
TWI775592B (zh) 用於控制照明裝置的控制裝置及方法
CN113126486B (zh) 用于控制可变物理参数的控制装置及方法
KR102443782B1 (ko) 미래 상호작용 예측 기반의 타겟 사용자 예측 방법 및 시스템
KR20240016704A (ko) 관측학습을 이용한 로봇 시스템의 남은 잔여모션 소요 시간 추정 방법

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20909334

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20909334

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1